WO2016038922A1 - Optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device - Google Patents

Optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016038922A1
WO2016038922A1 PCT/JP2015/061613 JP2015061613W WO2016038922A1 WO 2016038922 A1 WO2016038922 A1 WO 2016038922A1 JP 2015061613 W JP2015061613 W JP 2015061613W WO 2016038922 A1 WO2016038922 A1 WO 2016038922A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
film
group
acid
cellulose
compound
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2015/061613
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
佐々木 謙一
絢子 稲垣
知世 安達
岡野 賢
Original Assignee
コニカミノルタ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by コニカミノルタ株式会社 filed Critical コニカミノルタ株式会社
Publication of WO2016038922A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016038922A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B23/00Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose
    • B32B23/04Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose comprising such cellulosic plastic substance as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B23/08Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose comprising such cellulosic plastic substance as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B1/00Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements
    • G02B1/10Optical coatings produced by application to, or surface treatment of, optical elements
    • G02B1/14Protective coatings, e.g. hard coatings
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/30Polarising elements

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an optical film having a cured layer on at least one surface of a transparent substrate, a polarizing plate having the optical film, and an image display device having the polarizing plate.
  • a liquid crystal display which is one type of image display device, is widely used because it is thin, lightweight, and consumes little power.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal cell and a polarizing plate, and includes a liquid crystal cell sandwiched between two substrates (for example, a glass substrate) and sandwiched between two polarizing plates.
  • the polarizing plate is usually constituted by laminating a cellulose film and a polarizing film (polarizer).
  • the polarizing film made of a polyvinyl alcohol film is dyed with iodine and stretched, and the cellulose film is formed on both surfaces thereof. It is comprised by laminating.
  • Cellulose film is strong as the film itself, and has high handleability in the manufacturing process of polarizing plates, and has high reworkability after being made into polarizing plates and bonded to panels (liquid crystal cells). The demand is strong. However, since the cellulose film has high hygroscopicity and the polarizer is easily deteriorated by moisture, the cellulose film alone does not have sufficient protective function for the polarizer.
  • Patent Documents 1 and 2 for example, a cured layer is formed on a cellulose acylate film using a resin composition having a compound having a ring structure, thereby reducing the moisture permeability of the entire film, and thereby a polarizer.
  • a protective film that improves the protective function.
  • the cellulose acylate film a film having a film thickness of 80 ⁇ m is used in Patent Document 1, and a film having a film thickness of 60 ⁇ m is used in Patent Document 2.
  • JP 2006-83225 A see claims 1 to 3, paragraphs [0005], [0007], [0013], [0057], etc.
  • Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2014-95890 see claims 1 and 10, paragraphs [0006], [0007], [0031], [0236], etc.
  • the durability of the polarizer deteriorates as the polarizer becomes thinner.
  • the protective film especially the film base material
  • the moisture permeability of the protective film increases significantly and the protective function of the polarizer decreases in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment. Deteriorates further. For this reason, even if a film base material is a thin film, the protective film which can suppress the raise of the water vapor transmission rate in a high temperature, high humidity environment, and can suppress the fall of the protective function of a polarizer is calculated
  • the protective films of Patent Documents 1 and 2 are configured using a film base having a thickness of 80 ⁇ m or 60 ⁇ m, and the film base is a thin film (for example, a thickness of less than 35 ⁇ m), It does not suppress an increase in moisture permeability in a high temperature and high humidity environment, and does not suppress a decrease in the protective function of the polarizer.
  • the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and its purpose is to increase the moisture permeability in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment with a configuration in which a cured layer is formed on a thin cellulose-based film. Even when applied to a protective film for a polarizing plate, an optical film capable of suppressing a decrease in the protective function of the polarizer, a polarizing plate having the optical film, and an image having the polarizing plate It is to provide a display device.
  • the inventors of the present application have found that the above-mentioned problems can be solved by forming a cured layer having the following constitution on at least one surface of a thin cellulose-based film substrate. That is, the above object of the present invention is achieved by the following configuration.
  • An optical film according to one aspect of the present invention is an optical film having a cured layer on at least one surface of a transparent substrate,
  • the transparent substrate is a cellulose film having a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m or more and less than 35 ⁇ m
  • the cured layer is At least one kind of active energy ray-curable resin (A), wherein the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not contain a ring structure;
  • At least one compound (B) having a ring structure and having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less.
  • the cured layer formed on the thin cellulose film having a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m or more and less than 35 ⁇ m contains the specific resin and the specific compound.
  • the increase in moisture permeability under the environment can be suppressed.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of an image display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is sectional drawing which shows the structure of the optical film applied to the polarizing plate of the said image display apparatus.
  • the inventors of the present application form atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups to the cured layer.
  • A active energy ray-curable resin
  • the above-mentioned problem can be solved by including a curable resin (A) ”and a compound having a ring structure and a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 in a specific range (B). It was. The reason why the above problem can be solved is estimated as follows.
  • the cured layer containing the curable resin (A) and the compound (B) is prepared by preparing a cured layer composition (coating liquid) containing the curable resin (A) and the compound (B), and is cellulose-based. It is formed by coating on a film and curing the coating layer by irradiation with active energy rays.
  • the curable resin (A) contains an active energy group having a polar group, which causes an increase in moisture permeability in a high temperature and high humidity environment. Therefore, by adding the compound (B) having a polar group having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less, the polar group of the compound (B) is activated by the activity of the curable resin (A).
  • a cured film that can interact with (B) and has no gaps can be formed.
  • the maximum number of linear atoms is preferably 10 or more, and more preferably 11 or more. Moreover, since it will become difficult to obtain predetermined
  • the number of atoms arranged in a straight line as the spacer is preferably 8 or more, and more preferably 10 or more, for any spacer connecting any two active energy groups. Preferably, it is 11 or more.
  • the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 When the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 is less than 1.0, the polarity of the compound (B) is too high and the cured layer easily absorbs moisture, so that the moisture permeability increases in a high temperature and high humidity environment. It becomes difficult to suppress this. On the other hand, when the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 exceeds 7.0, the polarity of the compound (B) is too low to interact with the polar part of the active energy group of the curable resin (A), and the high temperature and high humidity It becomes difficult to suppress an increase in moisture permeability under the environment.
  • a preferred range of the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 is 2.0 or more and 6.0 or less, and a more preferred range is 2.5 or more and 5.5 or less.
  • the low molecular weight additive (compound (B)) is likely to bleed and the moisture permeation performance is likely to be deteriorated thereby, so that the molecular weight of the compound (B) is preferably 130 or more.
  • the molecular weight of the compound (B) is preferably 500 or less.
  • the cellulose-based film is a cellulose ester film
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of an image display device 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the image display device 1 is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is configured by bonding a protective portion 3 to a polarizing plate 5 (particularly on an optical film 15 described later) of the liquid crystal display panel 2 via a filling layer 31.
  • the filling layer 31 is an adhesive layer (void filler) made of a photocurable resin such as acrylic, and is formed on the entire surface of the polarizing plate 5 of the liquid crystal display panel 2.
  • the protection unit 3 protects the surface of the liquid crystal display panel 2 and is formed of a front plate made of acrylic resin or glass, for example. Note that a touch panel (such as a capacitance method or a resistance film method) may be used as the protection unit 3 instead of the front plate.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 2 is configured by disposing polarizing plates 5 and 6 on both sides of a liquid crystal cell 4 (display cell) in which a liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between a pair of substrates.
  • the polarizing plate 5 is attached to one surface side (for example, the viewing side) of the liquid crystal cell 4 via the adhesive layer 7.
  • the polarizing plate 6 is attached to the other surface side (for example, the backlight 9 side) of the liquid crystal cell 4 through the adhesive layer 8.
  • the driving method of the liquid crystal display panel 2 is not particularly limited, and various driving methods such as an IPS (In Plane Switching) type and a TN (Twisted Nematic) method can be employed.
  • the polarizing plate 5 includes a polarizer 11 that transmits predetermined linearly polarized light, a film substrate 12 and a cured layer 13 that are sequentially stacked on the protective portion 3 side of the polarizer 11, and a liquid crystal cell 4 side of the polarizer 11.
  • the optical film 14 is made up of.
  • the film base 12 and the cured layer 13 constitute an optical film 15 as a protective film formed on the surface on the viewing side of the polarizer 11.
  • the film substrate 12 is a transparent substrate made of a cellulose film. Examples of the cellulose film include a cellulose ether film and a cellulose ester film described later.
  • the film thickness of the film substrate 12 is 5 ⁇ m or more and less than 35 ⁇ m. By making the film substrate 12 thinner, the optical film 15 and the polarizing plate 5 can be made thinner, which can contribute to the thinning of the entire image display device 1.
  • the cured layer 13 may be composed of a single layer as shown in FIG. 1, but two or more layers may be laminated on the film substrate 12.
  • the cured layer 13 may be configured by laminating a first cured layer 13a and a second cured layer 13b from the film base 12 side.
  • the optical film 14 is provided to protect the back surface of the polarizing plate 5.
  • the optical film 14 may be made of the same material as the film base 12 (for example, a cellulose film), or may be made of other materials.
  • the film substrate 12 may be composed of a ⁇ / 4 film.
  • the ⁇ / 4 film is a layer that imparts in-plane retardation of about 1 ⁇ 4 of the wavelength to transmitted light, and in the present embodiment, the ⁇ / 4 film is composed of a film that is obliquely stretched.
  • the angle (crossing angle) formed between the slow axis of the ⁇ / 4 film and the absorption axis of the polarizer 11 is 30 ° to 60 °, whereby the linearly polarized light from the polarizer 11 is converted into the ⁇ / 4 film ( It is converted into circularly polarized light or elliptically polarized light by the film substrate 12).
  • the polarizing plate can be used regardless of how the transmission axis of the polarizer 11 (perpendicular to the absorption axis) and the transmission axis of the polarized sunglasses are misaligned.
  • the light component parallel to the transmission axis of the polarized sunglasses contained in the light emitted from 5 (circularly polarized light or elliptically polarized light) can be guided to the eyes of the observer. Thereby, it can suppress that it becomes difficult to see a display image with the angle to observe.
  • the film substrate 12 may contain a hindered amine compound.
  • the optical film 15 having the cured layer 13 formed on the film substrate 12 is adhered (UV adhesion) to the polarizer 11 by, for example, ultraviolet irradiation. By this UV irradiation, the film substrate 12 and the cured layer 13 are bonded to each other.
  • the adhesiveness may deteriorate. However, when the film base 12 contains a hindered amine compound, the above light-resistant adhesion can be improved.
  • the film substrate 12 is a specific polymer containing a specific organic acid, a specific phenol compound, or a main chain containing a benzene ring in order to suppress deterioration of the polarizer 11 under high temperature and high humidity or high temperature and low humidity. It may contain.
  • the polarizing plate 6 includes a polarizer 21 that transmits predetermined linearly polarized light, an optical film 22 that is disposed on the liquid crystal cell 4 side of the polarizer 21, and an optical that is disposed on the opposite side of the polarizer 21 from the liquid crystal cell 4.
  • the film 23 is laminated.
  • the polarizer 21 is disposed so that the transmission axis is perpendicular to the polarizer 11 (crossed Nicol state).
  • the optical films 22 and 23 are provided to protect the front and back surfaces of the polarizing plate 6, but they may be made of the same material as the film substrate 12 of the polarizing plate 5 (for example, a cellulose film). It may be made of other materials.
  • the above-described optical film 15 can be used for purposes other than the polarizing plate.
  • the cured layer 13 may be provided on both surfaces of the film substrate 12. Therefore, in the optical film 15, it can be said that the cured layer 13 may be formed on at least one surface of the film substrate 12.
  • the cured layer of this embodiment has at least one active energy in which the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not include a ring structure. It contains a linear curable resin (A).
  • the active energy group is a reactive group that can be cured by active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays, electron beams, and heat, and specifically includes an acryloyl group, an epoxide, an oxetane, an isocyanate group, and a vinyl group.
  • the active energy ray-curable resin is a resin that is cured through a crosslinking reaction by irradiation with active energy rays (also referred to as active rays) such as ultraviolet rays and electron beams.
  • active energy rays also referred to as active rays
  • a component containing a monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond is preferably used.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated double bond group include polymerizable functional groups such as (meth) acryloyl group, vinyl group, styryl group and allyl group. Among them, (meth) acryloyl group and —C (O) OCH ⁇ CH 2 is preferred.
  • the active energy ray-curable resin (A) is preferably an acrylate from the viewpoint of reactivity.
  • the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer The resin does not contain a ring structure.
  • the specific compound of such active energy ray curable resin (A) is shown, this invention is not limited to these.
  • a portion surrounded by a broken line represents an active energy group.
  • a portion surrounded by a solid line functions as a spacer connecting two active energy groups, and indicates a portion where the number of atoms arranged in a straight line as the spacer is maximized.
  • the hardened layer contains at least one compound (B) having a ring structure and having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less.
  • the acid dissociation constant is one of the indexes for quantitatively expressing the strength of the acid.
  • the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 represents an acid dissociation constant in the first dissociation (first-stage dissociation) of a polyvalent acid.
  • Examples of the compound (B) having a ring structure and having the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 in the above range include carboxylic acid-containing additives, barbituric acid compounds, and rosin compounds.
  • Carboxylic acid-containing additive a compound represented by the following general formula is preferable.
  • A is any one of hydrogen, methyl group, ethyl group, hydroxyl group, amino group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, and carboxylic acid group.
  • the additive contains one or more carboxylic acid groups.
  • L is nothing but any of the following structures.
  • carboxylic acid-containing additive examples include, for example, benzoic acid, 2-carboxyphenyl salicylate, 4-biphenylacetic acid, biphenyl-4-carboxylic acid, biphenyl-4-carboxylic acid, o-benzoylbenzoic acid, 2,2 '-Biphenyldicarboxylic acid, 4,4'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid, phthalic acid, 1,3,5-benzenetricarboxylic acid, diphenylacetic acid, cyclohexylcarboxylic acid, 1,3-adamantanedicarboxylic acid, triphenylacetic acid, N- ( 2,6-diethylphenylcarbamoylmethyl) iminodiacetic acid, N-benzyliminodiacetic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, orthophthalic acid, 2,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,
  • ⁇ Barbituric acid compound As the barbituric acid-based compound, a compound represented by the following general formula (G) is preferable.
  • R 26 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group
  • R 27 and R 28 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • R 29 represents a hydrogen atom.
  • R 26 , R 27 and R 28 may each independently have a substituent.
  • R 26 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferable, and a methyl group, a cyclohexyl group or a phenyl group is most preferable.
  • R 27 and R 28 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • a heteroaryl group is more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • an alkyl group having 1 to 12 (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms (cycloalkyl
  • a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a phenyl group, or a naphthyl group is most preferable, and a methyl group, an ethyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a phenyl group is particularly preferable.
  • R 26 may have is not particularly limited as long as it is not contrary to the gist of the present invention, but is preferably a halogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and preferably a halogen atom, a carbon number It is more preferably a 1 to 6 alkyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a chlorine atom, a methyl group or a phenyl group.
  • R 27 and R 28 may have is not particularly limited as long as it does not contradict the gist of the present invention, but is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, More preferably.
  • a compound represented by the following general formula (Ga) can be used as the compound represented by the above general formula (G).
  • the compound represented by the general formula (Ga) is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing volatilization during film formation.
  • L 1 to L 3 each independently represents a single bond or an alkylene group
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 each independently represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • L 1 to L 3 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 or more carbon atoms.
  • L 1 to L 3 are more preferably a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a single bond, a methylene group or an ethylene group, and a single bond or a methylene group.
  • the divalent linking group may have a substituent, and the substituent is synonymous with the substituent that Ar 1 , Ar 2 , and Ar 3 described later may have.
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 are preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 may have a substituent or may not have a substituent. When it has a substituent, it is preferable that the said substituent does not have a ring structure.
  • Ar 1 , Ar 2 , and Ar 3 may be an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, pentyl, heptyl, 1- Ethylpentyl, benzyl, 2-ethoxyethyl, 1-carboxymethyl, etc.), alkenyl groups (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, oleyl, etc.), alkynyl groups (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms).
  • alkyl group preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, pentyl, heptyl, 1- Ethylpentyl, benzyl, 2-ethoxyethyl, 1-carboxymethyl, etc.
  • alkenyl groups preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl,
  • cycloalkyl groups preferably having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 4-methylcyclohexyl, etc.
  • aryl groups preferably having 6 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • a heterocyclic group preferably a heterocyclic group having from 0 to 20 carbon atoms, wherein the ring-constituting hetero atom is preferably an oxygen atom, nitrogen atom or sulfur atom, and a 5- or 6-membered ring is a benzene ring Or may be condensed with a heterocyclic ring, and the ring may be a saturated ring, an unsaturated ring, or an aromatic ring.
  • a carbamoyl group preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N Phenylcarbamoyl, etc.
  • acylamino groups preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as acetylamino, acryloylamino, benzoylamino, nicotinamide, etc.
  • cyano groups hydroxyl groups, mercapto groups, or halogen atoms (eg, fluorine atoms, chlorines) Atom, bromine atom, iodine atom, etc.).
  • each of Ar 1 , Ar 2 , and Ar 3 may have, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an acyl group are preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the compound represented by the general formula (G) or (Ga) is preferably 250 to 1200, and more preferably 300 to 800. If the molecular weight is 250 or more, volatilization from the film is suppressed, and if it is 1200 or less, the compatibility with the cellulose acylate is excellent, and thus the transparency of the film is good.
  • the compound represented by the above general formula (G) can be synthesized using a synthesis method of barbituric acid in which a urea derivative and a malonic acid derivative are condensed.
  • Barbituric acid having two substituents on N can be obtained by heating N, N 'disubstituted urea and malonic acid chloride, or by combining malonic acid and an activating agent such as acetic anhydride.
  • an activating agent such as acetic anhydride.
  • the malonic acid used for the condensation may be either unsubstituted or substituted, and if malonic acid having a substituent corresponding to R 5 is used, by constructing barbituric acid, the general formula (G ) Can be synthesized. Further, when an unsubstituted malonic acid and a urea derivative are condensed, a 5-position unsubstituted barbituric acid is obtained. By modifying this, the compound represented by the general formula (G) can be synthesized. Good.
  • rosin compounds examples include the following structural formulas.
  • KE-604 and KE-610 are commercially available from Arakawa Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • KR-85, KR-612, and KR-614 are commercially available from Arakawa Chemical Industries, Ltd. as rosins
  • KR-140 as a polymerized rosin.
  • a mixture of abietic acid, dehydroabietic acid, and parastrinic acid is commercially available from Harima Kasei Co., Ltd. as G-7 and Hartle RX.
  • the cured layer may contain a sub-resin in addition to the main resin within a range that does not impair the effects of the present embodiment in order to increase the hardness.
  • the sub-resin includes a compound having a ring structure in the molecule and having an active energy group. Examples of such a sub-resin include a compound having a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and having 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated double bond groups in the molecule.
  • cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon group examples include norbornyl, tricyclodecanyl, tetracyclododecanyl, pentacyclopentadecanyl, adamantyl, diamantanyl and the like.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated double bond group include polymerizable functional groups such as (meth) acryloyl group, vinyl group, styryl group and allyl group. Among them, (meth) acryloyl group and —C (O) OCH ⁇ CH 2 is preferred. Particularly preferably, a compound containing three or more (meth) acryloyl groups in one molecule can be used as the sub-resin.
  • the cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon group and the ethylenically unsaturated double bond group are linked. It is constituted by bonding through a group.
  • the linking group a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may be substituted, an amide group which may be substituted at the N-position, a carbamoyl group which may be substituted at the N-position, an ester group, Examples include oxycarbonyl groups, ether groups, and the like, and groups obtained by combining these.
  • L represents a trivalent linking group
  • L ′ represents a divalent linking group
  • R, R ′, and R ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • L represents a divalent linking group
  • L ′ represents a trivalent linking group
  • R, R ′, and R ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • L and L ′ each independently represent a trivalent linking group
  • R, R ′, R ′′, and R ′ ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double group.
  • a group having a bond is represented.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • L represents a trivalent linking group
  • L ′ represents a divalent linking group
  • R, R ′, and R ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • L represents a trivalent linking group
  • L ′ represents a divalent linking group
  • R, R ′, and R ′′ each independently represents an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having
  • L and L ′ each independently represent a trivalent linking group
  • R, R ′, R ′′, and R ′ ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double group.
  • a group having a bond is represented.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
  • L represents a trivalent linking group
  • L ′ represents a divalent linking group
  • R, R ′, and R ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
  • L represents a divalent linking group
  • L ′ represents a trivalent linking group
  • R, R ′, and R ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
  • L and L ′ each independently represent a trivalent linking group
  • R, R ′, R ′′, and R ′ ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double group.
  • a group having a bond is represented.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
  • L, L ′, and L ′′ each independently represent a divalent linking group, and R, R ′, and R ′′ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having
  • L, L ′, and L ′ ′′ each independently represent a trivalent linking group
  • R ′′ ′ ′′ each independently represents a group having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • the cured layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator to accelerate the curing of the actinic radiation curable resin.
  • Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator include alkylphenone series, acetophenone, benzophenone, hydroxybenzophenone, Michler's ketone, ⁇ -amyloxime ester, thioxanthone and the like, and derivatives thereof. It is not something.
  • Commercially available products may be used as the photopolymerization initiator, and preferred examples include Irgacure 184, Irgacure 907, and Irgacure 651 manufactured by BASF Japan.
  • the hardened layer may contain fine particles. Although it does not restrict
  • the silica fine particles may be hollow particles having cavities inside. Fine particles coated with a polymer silane coupling agent are particularly preferred because they exhibit good mechanical properties.
  • the polymer silane coupling agent refers to a reaction product of a polymerizable monomer and a silane coupling agent (reactive silane compound).
  • a polymer silane coupling agent can be obtained, for example, according to the method for producing a reaction product of a polymerizable monomer and a reactive silane compound disclosed in JP-A-11-116240.
  • polymerizable monomer examples include (meth) acrylic acid, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid-n-propyl, (meth) acrylic acid isopropyl, (meth) -N-butyl, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid-n-hexyl, (meth) acrylic acid cyclohexyl, (meth) acrylic acid-n-heptyl, (meth) acrylic acid-n-octyl, ( 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, decyl (meth) acrylate, dodecyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, toluyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate , 2-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylate
  • an organosilicon compound represented by the following formula (1) is preferably used as the reactive silane compound.
  • XR-Si (OR) 3 (1) (In the formula, R represents an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms selected from a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group.
  • X represents a (meth) acryloyl group, an epoxy group (glycid group), a urethane group, an amino group, One or more functional groups selected from fluoro groups.)
  • organosilicon compound represented by the formula (1) examples include 3,3,3-trifluoropropyltrimethoxysilane, methyl-3,3,3-trifluoropropyldimethoxysilane, ⁇ - (3, 4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxymethyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxymethyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxyethyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxyethyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrie
  • Polymeric silane coupling agent is prepared by reacting a polymerizable monomer with a reactive silane compound. Specifically, an organic solvent solution in which a reactive silane compound is mixed in an amount of 0.5 to 20 parts by weight, further 1 to 10 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymerizable monomer is prepared, and polymerization is started. It can be obtained by adding an agent and heating.
  • the polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles can be prepared by adding a polymer silane coupling agent to a fine particle organic solvent dispersion and coating the fine particles with the polymer silane coupling agent in the presence of an alkali.
  • the average particle diameter of the resulting polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles is preferably 5 to 500 nm, more preferably 10 to 200 nm, from the viewpoint of securing optical properties when used in an optical film.
  • the content of the polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles in the cured layer is preferably 0.5 to 80 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 60 parts by mass as the solid content, from the viewpoint of securing the film strength of the cured layer. .
  • the hardened layer may contain a conductive agent in order to impart antistatic properties.
  • Preferred conductive agents include metal oxide particles or ⁇ -conjugated conductive polymers.
  • An ionic liquid is also preferably used as the conductive compound.
  • the cured layer may contain a fluorine-siloxane graft compound, a fluorine compound, a silicone compound, or a compound having an HLB value of 3 to 18 from the viewpoint of improving the coating property.
  • the hydrophilicity can be easily controlled by adjusting the types and amounts of these additives.
  • the HLB value is Hydrophile-Lipophile-Balance, that is, a hydrophilic-lipophilic balance, and is a value indicating the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of a compound. The smaller the HLB value, the higher the lipophilicity, and the higher the value, the higher the hydrophilicity.
  • the HLB value can be obtained by the following calculation formula.
  • HLB 7 + 11.7Log (Mw / Mo)
  • Mw represents the molecular weight of the hydrophilic group
  • Mo represents the molecular weight of the lipophilic group
  • Mw + Mo M (molecular weight of the compound).
  • HLB value 20 ⁇ total formula weight of hydrophilic part / molecular weight (J. Soc. Cosmetic Chem., 5 (1954), 294) and the like.
  • Emulgen 109P (13.6), Emulgen 120 (15.3), Emulgen 123P (16.9), Emulgen 147 (16.3), Emulgen 210P (10.7), Emulgen 220 (14.2) , Emulgen 306P (9.4), Emulgen 320P (13.9), Emulgen 404 (8.8), Emulgen 408 (10.0), Emulgen 409PV (12.0), Emulgen 420 (13.6), Emulgen 430 (16.2), Emulgen 705 (10.5), Emulgen 707 (12.1), Emulgen 7 9 (13.3), Emulgen 1108 (13.5), Emulgen 1118S-70 (16.4), Emulgen 1135S-70 (17.9), Emulgen 2020G-HA (13.0), Emulgen 2025G (15.
  • Emulgen LS-106 (12.5), Emulgen LS-110 (13.4), Emulgen LS-114 (14.0), manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd .: Surfynol 104E (4), Surfynol 104H (4), Surfinol 104A (4), Surfinol 104BC (4), Surfinol 104DPM (4), Surfinol 104PA (4), Surfinol 104PG-50 (4), Surfinol 104S (4), Surfi Knoll 420 (4), Surfynol 440 (8), Surfynol 46 (13), Surfynol 485 (17), Surfynol SE (6), Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.: X-22-4272 (7), X-22-6266 (8).
  • the fluorine-siloxane graft compound refers to a copolymer compound obtained by grafting polysiloxane and / or organopolysiloxane containing siloxane and / or organosiloxane alone on at least a fluorine resin.
  • a fluorine-siloxane graft compound can be prepared by a method as described in Examples described later.
  • examples of commercially available products include ZX-022H, ZX-007C, ZX-049, and ZX-047-D manufactured by Fuji Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • fluorine-based compound examples include Megafac series (F-477, F-487, F-569, etc.) manufactured by DIC Corporation, OPTOOL DSX, OPTOOL DAC, etc. manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd.
  • silicone compounds are Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: KF-351, KF-352, KF-353, KF-354L, KF-355A, KF-615A, KF-945, KF-618, KF-6011, KF. -6015, KF-6004, manufactured by Big Chemie Japan KK: BYK-UV3576, BYK-UV3535, BYK-UV3510, BYK-UV3505, BYK-UV3500, BYK-UV3510, and the like. These components are preferably added in a range of 0.005 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less with respect to the solid component in the cured layer composition. Two or more kinds of these components may be added as long as the total additive amount is in the range of 0.005 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less.
  • the hardened layer may contain an ultraviolet absorber described in the cellulose ester film described later.
  • an ultraviolet absorber described in the cellulose ester film described later.
  • the cured layer in contact with the film substrate preferably contains the ultraviolet absorber.
  • the cured layer is a component that forms the cured layer described above, diluted with a solvent that swells or partially dissolves the film substrate, and is applied as a cured layer composition on the film substrate in the following manner, dried. It is preferable to provide it by curing.
  • Solvents include ketones (methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, etc.) and / or acetate esters (methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, etc.), alcohols (ethanol, methanol, normal propanol, isopropanol), propylene glycol monomethyl ether, cyclohexanone, methyl isobutyl ketone. Etc. are preferable.
  • the coating amount of the cured layer composition is suitably an amount that results in a wet film thickness of 0.1 to 80 ⁇ m, and preferably an amount that results in a wet film thickness of 0.5 to 30 ⁇ m.
  • the dry film thickness is in the range of an average film thickness of 0.01 to 20 ⁇ m, preferably in the range of 1 to 15 ⁇ m. More preferably, it is in the range of 2 to 12 ⁇ m.
  • a known method such as a gravure coater, a dip coater, a reverse coater, a wire bar coater, a die coater, or an ink jet method can be used.
  • the cured layer is preferably composed of two or more layers from the viewpoint of surface hardness (abrasion resistance).
  • the outermost surface layer contains the above-described polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles.
  • the thickness of the cured layer in contact with the film substrate is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 50 ⁇ m, and the thickness of the second cured layer is in the range of 0.01 to 25 ⁇ m. It is preferable that
  • Two or more layers may be formed by simultaneous multilayers.
  • the simultaneous multi-layer is to form a hardened layer by applying two or more hardened layers on a base material without going through a drying step.
  • the layers are stacked one after another with an extrusion coater or simultaneously with a slot die having a plurality of slits. Can be done.
  • the cured layer composition After applying the cured layer composition, it may be dried and cured (irradiated with actinic radiation (also referred to as UV curing treatment)), and if necessary, may be heat treated after UV curing.
  • the heat treatment temperature after UV curing is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 100 ° C. or higher, and particularly preferably 120 ° C. or higher.
  • Drying is preferably performed at a temperature of 30% or more in the rate of drying section. More preferably, the temperature of the decreasing rate drying section is 50 ° C. or higher.
  • drying process changes from a constant state to a gradually decreasing state when drying starts.
  • a section in which the drying speed is constant is called a constant rate drying section, and a section in which the drying speed decreases is called a decreasing rate drying section.
  • any light source that generates ultraviolet rays can be used without limitation.
  • a low pressure mercury lamp, a medium pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon lamp, or the like can be used.
  • Irradiation conditions vary depending on each lamp, but the irradiation amount of active rays is usually in the range of 50 to 1000 mJ / cm 2 , preferably in the range of 50 to 300 mJ / cm 2 .
  • oxygen removal for example, replacement with an inert gas such as nitrogen purge
  • the cured state of the surface can be controlled by adjusting the removal amount of the oxygen concentration.
  • the tension to be applied is preferably 30 to 300 N / m.
  • the method for applying tension is not particularly limited, and tension may be applied in the conveying direction on the back roller, or tension may be applied in the width direction or biaxial direction by a tenter. Thereby, a film having further excellent flatness can be obtained.
  • the back coat layer may provide a backcoat layer in the surface on the opposite side to the side which provided the hardened layer of the optical film.
  • the back coat layer is provided to correct curling caused by providing a hardened layer or other layers by coating or CVD. That is, the degree of curling can be balanced by imparting the property of being rounded with the surface on which the backcoat layer is provided facing inward.
  • the back coat layer is preferably applied also as an anti-blocking layer. In that case, fine particles may be added to the back coat layer coating composition to provide an anti-blocking function. preferable.
  • examples of inorganic compounds include silicon dioxide, titanium dioxide, aluminum oxide, zirconium oxide, calcium carbonate, calcium carbonate, talc, clay, calcined kaolin, calcined calcium silicate, tin oxide, and oxide. Mention may be made of indium, zinc oxide, ITO, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate and calcium phosphate. Fine particles containing silicon are preferable in terms of low haze, and silicon dioxide is particularly preferable.
  • These fine particles are commercially available under the trade names of, for example, Aerosil R972, R972V, R974, R812, 200, 200V, 300, R202, OX50, and TT600 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.). .
  • Zirconium oxide fine particles are commercially available, for example, under the trade names Aerosil R976 and R811 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.) and can be used.
  • the polymer fine particles include a silicone resin, a fluororesin, and an acrylic resin. Silicone resins are preferable, and those having a three-dimensional network structure are particularly preferable. For example, Tospearl 103, 105, 108, 120, 145, 3120, and 240 (manufactured by Toshiba Silicone Co., Ltd.) It is marketed by name and can be used.
  • Aerosil 200V and Aerosil R972V are particularly preferably used because they have a large anti-blocking effect while keeping haze low.
  • the dynamic friction coefficient on the back side of the optical film used in this embodiment is preferably 0.9 or less, particularly preferably 0.1 to 0.9.
  • the fine particles contained in the backcoat layer are preferably contained in an amount of 0.1 to 50% by weight, more preferably 0.1 to 10% by weight, based on the binder.
  • the increase in haze when the backcoat layer is provided is preferably 1% or less, more preferably 0.5% or less, and particularly preferably 0.0 to 0.1%.
  • the backcoat layer is preferably formed by applying a composition containing a solvent that dissolves or swells the transparent resin film (film substrate).
  • the solvent to be used may include a solvent to be dissolved and / or a solvent to be swollen in addition to a solvent to be swelled, a composition in which these are mixed at an appropriate ratio depending on the degree of curl of the transparent resin film and the type of resin What is necessary is just to form by the application quantity.
  • Examples of the solvent for dissolving or swelling the transparent resin film contained in such a mixed composition include dioxane, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, N, N-dimethylformamide, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, cyclohexane, diacetone alcohol, 1 , 3-dioxolane, N-methylpyrrolidone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene carbonate, cyclopentanone, 3-pentanone, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, tetrahydrofuran, ethyl lactate, bis (2-methoxyethyl) ether, acetic acid 2 -Methoxyethyl, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, trichloroethylene, methylene chloride, ethylene chloride, tetrachloroethane, trichloroethane, chloroform and the like.
  • solvent that does not dissolve examples include methanol, ethanol, n-propyl alcohol, i-propyl alcohol, n-butanol, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, and hydrocarbons (toluene, xylene, cyclohexanol).
  • the back coat layer may contain a resin as a binder.
  • the resin used as the binder for the backcoat layer include vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, vinyl chloride resin, vinyl acetate resin, vinyl acetate-vinyl alcohol copolymer, partially hydrolyzed vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer.
  • Vinyl polymer or copolymer nitrocellulose, cellulose acetate propionate (preferably acetyl group substitution degree 1.8-2.3, propionyl group substitution degree 0.1-1.0), diacetylcellulose, cellulose Cellulose derivatives such as acetate butyrate resin, maleic acid and / or Or acrylic acid copolymer, acrylic ester copolymer, acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer, chlorinated polyethylene, acrylonitrile-chlorinated polyethylene-styrene copolymer, methyl methacrylate-butadiene-styrene copolymer, acrylic resin Rubber resins such as polyvinyl acetal resin, polyvinyl butyral resin, polyester polyurethane resin, polyether polyurethane resin, polycarbonate polyurethane resin, polyester resin, polyether resin, polyamide resin, amino resin, styrene-butadiene resin, butadiene-acrylonitrile resin, Examples thereof include, but are
  • acrylic resins Acrypet MD, VH, MF, V (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Hyperl M-4003, M-4005, M-4006, M-4202, M-5000, M-5001, M-4501 (manufactured by Negami Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Dialnal BR-50, BR-52, BR-53, BR-60, BR-64, BR-73, BR-75, BR-77, BR-79, BR -80, BR-82, BR-83, BR-85, BR-87, BR-88, BR-90, BR-93, BR-95, BR-100, BR-101, BR-102, BR-105 BR-106, BR-107, BR-108, BR-112, BR-113, BR-115, BR-116, BR-117, BR-118, etc.
  • the methacrylic monomers such as various homopolymers and copolymers were prepared as raw materials are commercially available and can also be selected as appropriate preferred from among these.
  • a cellulose resin layer such as diacetyl cellulose or cellulose acetate propionate is preferable.
  • the order of coating the backcoat layer may be before or after coating the cured layer on the side opposite to the backcoat layer of the optical film, but if the backcoat layer also serves as an anti-blocking layer, coat it first. It is desirable to do.
  • the back coat layer can be applied twice or more before and after the coating of the hardened layer.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra (JIS B0601: 2001) of the hardened layer is preferably in the range of 2 to 100 nm, particularly preferably in the range of 2 to 20 nm. By setting the arithmetic average roughness Ra within the above range, the visibility and the clearness are excellent.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra is a value measured with an optical interference surface roughness meter (manufactured by ZYGO, NewView) according to JIS B0601: 2001.
  • Haze The haze of the optical film is preferably in the range of 0.05% to 10% in view of visibility when used in an image display device. Haze can be measured according to JIS K7105 and JIS K7136.
  • index of hardness is HB or more. If the pencil hardness is equal to or higher than HB, it is difficult to be damaged in the polarizing plate forming step.
  • the cured optical layer was conditioned at a temperature of 23 ° C. and a relative humidity of 55% for 2 hours or more, and then the cured layer was JIS K5400 using a test pencil specified by JIS S 6006 under a load of 500 g. Is a value measured in accordance with the pencil hardness evaluation method defined by.
  • the film substrate is composed of a cellulose-based film.
  • a cellulose film it is preferable that manufacture is easy, it is easy to adhere
  • the cellulose ether film is a film containing a cellulose ether resin composition (hereinafter also simply referred to as cellulose ether) as a main component.
  • the cellulose ether is preferably one in which the hydroxyl group of cellulose is substituted with an alkoxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms. Specifically, it is preferable that the hydroxyl group of cellulose is substituted by any one of a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group or a plurality of alkoxy groups. In particular, those in which the hydroxyl group of cellulose is substituted by a single or a plurality of alkoxy groups of methoxy group and ethoxy group are preferable. Among them, the degree of ethoxy substitution (DSet) is 1.8 or more and 2.8 or less, more preferably DSet is 1 Ethyl cellulose satisfying .8 or more and 2.5 or less can be preferably used.
  • DSet represents the average ethoxylation of the three hydroxyl groups present at the 2, 3, and 6 positions in the cellulose molecule. It shows that the hydroxyl group is ethoxylated.
  • the degree of substitution at each position may be equal or may be biased to any position.
  • the degree of ether substitution can be quantified by the method described in ASTM D4794-94.
  • the degree of substitution is less than 1.8, the type of solvent that can be dissolved alone is limited, and the water absorption rate of the film increases and the dimensional stability tends to decrease. Even if the degree of substitution exceeds 2.8, not only the type of solvent to be dissolved is limited, but the resin itself tends to be expensive.
  • Cellulose ether can be produced by a method known per se. For example, it can be produced by treating cellulose with a strong caustic soda solution to make alkali cellulose, reacting it with methyl chloride or ethyl chloride, and etherifying it.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the cellulose ether is preferably 100,000 to 400,000, more preferably 130,000 to 300,000, and further preferably 150,000 to 250,000.
  • the molecular weight is larger than 400,000, not only the solubility in the solvent is lowered, but also the viscosity of the resulting solution becomes too high, not suitable for the solvent casting method, making thermoforming difficult, and the transparency of the film is lowered. Tend to cause such problems.
  • the molecular weight is smaller than 100,000, the mechanical strength of the resulting film tends to decrease.
  • cellulose ether produced from a single raw material may be used, or two or more kinds of cellulose ethers having different raw materials may be used in combination.
  • the cellulose ester film is a film containing a cellulose ester resin composition as a main component.
  • the cellulose ester is a part or all of hydrogen atoms of hydroxyl groups (—OH) at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions in the ⁇ -1,4 bonded glucose units constituting cellulose.
  • —OH hydroxyl groups
  • cellulose ester films examples include Konica Minoltack KC8UX, KC4UX, KC8UY, KC4UAY, KC6UA, KC4UA, KC2UA, KC4UE and KC4UZ (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.).
  • the refractive index of the cellulose ester film is preferably 1.45 to 1.55.
  • the refractive index can be measured according to JIS K7142-2008.
  • the cellulose ester is preferably a lower fatty acid ester of cellulose.
  • Lower fatty acid means a fatty acid having 6 or less carbon atoms.
  • the lower fatty acid ester of cellulose include, for example, cellulose acetate, cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose butyrate and the like, and mixed fatty acid esters such as cellulose acetate propionate and cellulose acetate butyrate. it can.
  • Particularly preferably used lower fatty acid esters of cellulose are cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, and cellulose acetate propionate. These cellulose esters can be used alone or in combination.
  • Cellulose diacetate preferably has an average degree of acetylation (bound acetic acid amount) of 51.0% to 56.0%.
  • Commercially available products include L20, L30, L40, and L50 manufactured by Daicel Corporation, and Ca398-3, Ca398-6, Ca398-10, Ca398-30, and Ca394-60S manufactured by Eastman Chemical Japan Co., Ltd. .
  • the cellulose triacetate preferably has an average degree of acetylation (bound acetic acid amount) of 54.0 to 62.5%, and more preferably cellulose triacetate having an average degree of acetylation of 58.0 to 62.5%. is there.
  • the cellulose triacetate preferably contains cellulose triacetate A and cellulose triacetate B.
  • Cellulose triacetate A is a cellulose triacetate having a number average molecular weight (Mn) of 125,000 or more and less than 155000, a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 265,000 or more and less than 310,000, and Mw / Mn of 1.9 to 2.1.
  • Cellulose triacetate B has an acetyl group substitution degree of 2.75 to 2.90, Mn of 155,000 or more and less than 180,000, Mw of 290000 or more and less than 360,000, and Mw / Mn of 1.8 to 2.0.
  • Cellulose acetate propionate has an acyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms as a substituent, and when the substitution degree of acetyl group is X and the substitution degree of propionyl group or butyryl group is Y, the following formula (I ) And (II) are preferably satisfied at the same time.
  • the method for measuring the substitution degree of the acyl group can be measured according to ASTM-D817-96.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) and molecular weight distribution (Mw) of the cellulose ester can be measured using high performance liquid chromatography.
  • the measurement conditions are as follows.
  • the film substrate may be configured by using a thermoplastic acrylic resin in combination with a cellulosic resin.
  • Acrylic resin also includes methacrylic resin.
  • the acrylic resin is not particularly limited but is preferably composed of 50 to 99% by mass of methyl methacrylate units and 1 to 50% by mass of other monomer units copolymerizable therewith.
  • Examples of other copolymerizable monomers include alkyl methacrylates having 2 to 18 alkyl carbon atoms, alkyl acrylates having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkyl acrylates such as acrylic acid and methacrylic acid.
  • Unsaturated group-containing divalent carboxylic acids such as saturated acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid and itaconic acid, aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene and ⁇ -methylstyrene, ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated nitriles such as acrylonitrile and methacrylonitrile, Examples thereof include maleic anhydride, maleimide, N-substituted maleimide, glutaric anhydride, and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, n-propyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, s-butyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, and the like are preferable from the viewpoint of thermal decomposition resistance and fluidity of the copolymer.
  • -Butyl acrylate is particularly preferably used.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 80,000 to 500,000, more preferably 110,000 to 500,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin can be measured by gel permeation chromatography.
  • Commercially available acrylic resins include, for example, Delpet 60N, 80N (Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation), Dianal BR52, BR80, BR83, BR85, BR88 (Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), KT75 (Electrochemical Industry Co., Ltd.) )) And the like. Two or more acrylic resins can be used in combination.
  • a ⁇ / 4 film may be used as the film substrate.
  • the ⁇ / 4 film when the optical film of the present embodiment is incorporated in an image display device, it is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent visibility and crosstalk.
  • a ⁇ / 4 film refers to a film having an in-plane retardation of the film of about 1 ⁇ 4 with respect to a predetermined light wavelength (usually in the visible light region).
  • the ⁇ / 4 film is preferably a broadband ⁇ / 4 film having a phase difference of approximately 1 ⁇ 4 of the wavelength in the visible light wavelength range in order to obtain almost perfect circularly polarized light in the visible light wavelength range. .
  • the ⁇ / 4 film has an in-plane retardation value Ro (550) measured at a wavelength of 550 nm, preferably in the range of 60 nm to 220 nm, more preferably in the range of 80 nm to 200 nm, and more preferably in the range of 90 nm to 190 nm. More preferably, it is the range.
  • nx and ny are the maximum refractive index in the plane of the film (also referred to as the refractive index in the slow axis direction) out of the refractive index at 23 ° C.
  • Ro can be calculated by measuring the birefringence at each wavelength in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH using an automatic birefringence meter KOBRA-21ADH (manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments).
  • Ro (A) indicates an in-plane retardation value measured at a wavelength of Anm.
  • a circularly polarizing plate is obtained by laminating so that the angle between the slow axis of the ⁇ / 4 film and the transmission axis of the polarizer described later is substantially 45 °.
  • Substantially 45 ° means in the range of 30 ° to 60 °, more preferably in the range of 40 ° to 50 °.
  • the angle between the in-plane slow axis of the ⁇ / 4 film and the transmission axis of the polarizer is preferably 41 to 49 °, more preferably 42 to 48 °, and 43 to 47 °. Is more preferably 44 to 46 °.
  • the ⁇ / 4 film is not particularly limited as long as it is an optically transparent resin.
  • the cellulose-based resin described above can be used.
  • the ⁇ / 4 film is preferably a cellulose resin or a polycarbonate resin.
  • the ⁇ / 4 film is preferably a cellulose resin.
  • the retardation adjustment of ⁇ / 4 can be performed by adding a retardation adjusting agent to the film base described above.
  • a retardation adjusting agent an aromatic compound having two or more aromatic rings as described in the specification of European Patent 911,656A2 can be used.
  • the aromatic ring of the aromatic compound includes an aromatic heterocycle in addition to an aromatic hydrocarbon ring. Particularly preferred is an aromatic heterocycle, and the aromatic heterocycle is generally an unsaturated heterocycle. Of these, a 1,3,5-triazine ring is particularly preferred.
  • (Fine particles) In order to improve the handling property, for example, acrylic particles, silicon dioxide, titanium dioxide, aluminum oxide, zirconium oxide, calcium carbonate, kaolin, talc, calcined calcium silicate, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate Further, it is preferable to contain inorganic fine particles such as magnesium silicate and calcium phosphate and a matting agent such as a crosslinked polymer.
  • the acrylic particles are not particularly limited, but are preferably multi-layered acrylic granular composites.
  • silicon dioxide is preferable in that the haze of the film substrate can be reduced.
  • the primary average particle diameter of the fine particles is preferably 20 nm or less, more preferably in the range of 5 to 16 nm, and particularly preferably in the range of 5 to 12 nm.
  • a film base material contains the ester compound or sugar ester represented by the following general formula (X) from a viewpoint of the dimensional stability by environmental change.
  • the ester compound represented by the general formula (X) will be described.
  • B is a hydroxy group or carboxylic acid residue
  • G is an alkylene glycol residue having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, an aryl glycol residue having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or an oxyalkylene glycol residue having 4 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • A represents an alkylene dicarboxylic acid residue having 4 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl dicarboxylic acid residue having 6 to 12 carbon atoms
  • n represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • the alkylene glycol component having 2 to 12 carbon atoms includes ethylene glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,2-butanediol, 1,3-butanediol, 1,2-propanediol, 2-methyl 1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 2,2-dimethyl-1,3-propanediol (neopentyl glycol), 2 , 2-diethyl-1,3-propanediol (3,3-dimethylolpentane), 2-n-butyl-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol (3,3-dimethylolheptane), 3-methyl- 1,5-pentanediol 1,6-hexanediol, 2,2,4-trimethyl 1,3-pentanediol, 2-ethyl
  • alkylene glycols having 2 to 12 carbon atoms are particularly preferable because of excellent compatibility with cellulose acetate.
  • aryl glycol component having 6 to 12 carbon atoms include hydroquinone, resorcin, bisphenol A, bisphenol F, bisphenol and the like, and these glycols can be used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
  • Examples of the oxyalkylene glycol component having 4 to 12 carbon atoms include diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, and tripropylene glycol. These glycols may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Can be used as a mixture.
  • Examples of the alkylene dicarboxylic acid component having 4 to 12 carbon atoms include succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, dodecanedicarboxylic acid, and the like. Used as a mixture of two or more.
  • arylene dicarboxylic acid component having 6 to 12 carbon atoms examples include phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, 1,5 naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, and 1,4 naphthalene dicarboxylic acid.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (X) (compound X-1 to compound X-17) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
  • the sugar ester compound is an ester other than cellulose ester, and is a compound obtained by esterifying all or part of the OH group of a sugar such as the following monosaccharide, disaccharide, trisaccharide or oligosaccharide.
  • sugar examples include glucose, galactose, mannose, fructose, xylose, arabinose, lactose, sucrose, nystose, 1F-fructosyl nystose, stachyose, maltitol, lactitol, lactulose, cellobiose, maltose, cellotriose, maltotriose, raffinose And kestose.
  • gentiobiose, gentiotriose, gentiotetraose, xylotriose, galactosyl sucrose, and the like are also included.
  • compounds having a furanose structure and / or a pyranose structure are particularly preferable.
  • sucrose, kestose, nystose, 1F-fructosyl nystose, stachyose and the like are preferable, and sucrose is more preferable.
  • oligosaccharides maltooligosaccharides, isomaltooligosaccharides, fructooligosaccharides, galactooligosaccharides, and xylo-oligosaccharides can also be preferably used.
  • the monocarboxylic acid used for esterifying the sugar is not particularly limited, and known aliphatic monocarboxylic acid, alicyclic monocarboxylic acid, aromatic monocarboxylic acid and the like can be used.
  • the carboxylic acid to be used may be one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
  • Preferred aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, enanthic acid, caprylic acid, pelargonic acid, capric acid, 2-ethyl-hexanecarboxylic acid, undecylic acid, lauric acid , Saturated fatty acids such as tridecylic acid, myristic acid, pentadecylic acid, palmitic acid, heptadecylic acid, stearic acid, nonadecanoic acid, arachidic acid, behenic acid, lignoceric acid, serotic acid, heptacosanoic acid, montanic acid, melicic acid, and laxelic acid And unsaturated fatty acids such as undecylenic acid, oleic acid, sorbic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, arachidonic acid and octen
  • Examples of preferred alicyclic monocarboxylic acids include cyclopentane carboxylic acid, cyclohexane carboxylic acid, cyclooctane carboxylic acid, or derivatives thereof.
  • Examples of preferred aromatic monocarboxylic acids include benzoic acid, aromatic monocarboxylic acids having an alkyl group or alkoxy group introduced into the benzene ring of benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, benzylic acid, biphenylcarboxylic acid, naphthalenecarboxylic acid, tetralin
  • An aromatic monocarboxylic acid having two or more benzene rings such as carboxylic acid, or a derivative thereof can be mentioned, and more specifically, xylic acid, hemelic acid, mesitylene acid, planicylic acid, ⁇ -isojurylic acid, Julylic acid, mesitic acid, ⁇ -isoduric acid, cumic acid, ⁇ -toluic acid, hydroatropic acid
  • ester compounds esterified an acetyl compound into which an acetyl group has been introduced by esterification is preferable.
  • the specific example of the sugar ester compound which can be used for this embodiment below is shown, it is not limited to these.
  • the sugar ester compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Y). Below, the compound shown by general formula (Y) is demonstrated.
  • R 1 ⁇ R 8 is a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 22 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group having 2 to 22 carbon atoms, R 1 R 8 may be the same or different.
  • the substitution degree distribution can be adjusted to the desired substitution degree by adjusting the esterification reaction time or mixing compounds with different substitution degrees.
  • the ester compound or sugar ester compound represented by the general formula (X) is preferably contained in the cellulose acetate film in an amount of 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 5 to 25% by mass. It is particularly preferred that
  • the film substrate may contain a plasticizer as necessary.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited, but is a polycarboxylic acid ester plasticizer, glycolate plasticizer, phthalate ester plasticizer, phosphate ester plasticizer, polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer, acrylic plasticizer. Agents and the like. In these, an acrylic plasticizer is preferable from the point which can control a film base material to the retardation value mentioned later.
  • the polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer is a plasticizer composed of an ester of a divalent or higher aliphatic polyhydric alcohol and a monocarboxylic acid, and preferably has an aromatic ring or a cycloalkyl ring in the molecule.
  • a divalent to 20-valent aliphatic polyhydric alcohol ester is preferred.
  • Specific examples of the polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
  • the glycolate plasticizer is not particularly limited, but alkylphthalylalkyl glycolates can be preferably used.
  • alkyl phthalyl alkyl glycolates include methyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, propyl phthalyl propyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, octyl phthalyl octyl glycolate, methyl phthalyl ethyl Glycolate, ethyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl propyl glycolate, methyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, propyl phthalyl butyl glycol Butyl phthalyl propyl glycolate, methyl phthalyl octyl
  • phthalate ester plasticizer examples include diethyl phthalate, dimethoxyethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, dicyclohexyl phthalate, and dicyclohexyl terephthalate.
  • phosphate ester plasticizer examples include triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, cresyl diphenyl phosphate, octyl diphenyl phosphate, diphenyl biphenyl phosphate, trioctyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate, and the like.
  • the polycarboxylic acid ester plasticizer is a compound composed of an ester of a divalent or higher, preferably a divalent to 20-valent polyvalent carboxylic acid and an alcohol.
  • Specific examples include triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate, acetyl triethyl citrate (ATEC), acetyl tributyl citrate (ATBC), benzoyl tributyl citrate, acetyl triphenyl citrate, acetyl tribenzyl citrate, dibutyl tartrate, tartaric acid
  • examples include, but are not limited to, diacetyldibutyl, tributyl trimellitic acid, tetrabutyl pyromellitic acid, and the like.
  • the acrylic plasticizer is preferably an acrylic polymer, and the acrylic polymer is preferably a homopolymer or copolymer of acrylic acid or alkyl methacrylate.
  • the acrylate monomer include methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate (i-, n-), butyl acrylate (n-, i-, s-, t-), pentyl acrylate ( n-, i-, s-), hexyl acrylate (n-, i-), heptyl acrylate (n-, i-), octyl acrylate (n-, i-), nonyl acrylate (n-, i-), myristyl acrylate (n-, i-), acrylic acid (2-ethylhexyl), acrylic acid ( ⁇ -caprolactone), acrylic acid (2-hydroxyethyl), acrylic acid (2-hydroxypropyl), acrylic Acid (3-hydroxypropyl), acrylic
  • the acrylic polymer is a homopolymer or copolymer of the above monomer, but preferably has 30% by mass or more of acrylic acid methyl ester monomer units, and has 40% by mass or more of methacrylic acid methyl ester monomer units. It is preferable. In particular, a homopolymer of methyl acrylate or methyl methacrylate is preferred.
  • the above-mentioned plasticizer is contained in the film base material of this embodiment, it is preferably contained in an amount of 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 35% by mass with respect to cellulose acetate. It is particularly preferable to contain 25% by mass.
  • the film base material of this embodiment may contain an ultraviolet absorber. Since the ultraviolet absorber absorbs ultraviolet rays of 400 nm or less, durability can be improved. In particular, the ultraviolet absorber preferably has a transmittance of 10% or less at a wavelength of 370 nm, more preferably 5% or less, and still more preferably 2% or less. Specific examples of the ultraviolet absorber are not particularly limited. For example, oxybenzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, salicylic acid ester compounds, benzophenone compounds, cyanoacrylate compounds, triazine compounds, nickel complex salts, inorganic powders. Examples include the body.
  • 5-chloro-2- (3,5-di-sec-butyl-2-hydroxylphenyl) -2H-benzotriazole, (2-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -6 -(Linear and side chain dodecyl) -4-methylphenol, 2-hydroxy-4-benzyloxybenzophenone, 2,4-benzyloxybenzophenone, and the like can be used.
  • Commercially available products may be used.
  • TINUVIN such as TINUVIN 109, TINUVIN 171, TINUVIN 234, TINUVIN 326, TINUVIN 327, and TINUVIN 328 manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd. can be preferably used.
  • UV absorbers are benzotriazole ultraviolet absorbers, benzophenone ultraviolet absorbers, and triazine ultraviolet absorbers, and particularly preferably benzotriazole ultraviolet absorbers and benzophenone ultraviolet absorbers.
  • a discotic compound such as a compound having a 1,3,5 triazine ring is also preferably used as the ultraviolet absorber.
  • a polymer UV absorber can be preferably used, and a polymer type UV absorber is particularly preferably used.
  • TINUVIN 109 octyl-3- [3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5- (5-chloro-2H-benzotriazole-2-) manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd., which is a commercial product, is available.
  • TINUVIN 400 (4,6-bis (2,4-dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazin-2-yl) -manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.- Reaction product of 5-hydroxyphenyl and oxirane
  • TINUVIN 460 (2,4-bis [2-hydroxy-4-butoxyphenyl] -6- (2,4-dibutoxyphenyl) -1,3-5 Triazine)
  • TINUVIN 405 (2- (2,4-dihydroxyphenyl) -4,6-bis- (2,4-dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine and (2-ethylhexyl) -glycidic acid ester Reaction products) and the like.
  • the ultraviolet absorber is added by dissolving the ultraviolet absorber in an alcohol, such as methanol, ethanol, butanol or the like, an organic solvent such as methylene chloride, methyl acetate, acetone, dioxolane, or a mixed solvent thereof, and then becomes a film substrate. It may be added to the resin solution (dope) or directly during the dope composition.
  • an organic solvent such as methylene chloride, methyl acetate, acetone, dioxolane, or a mixed solvent thereof.
  • a dissolver or a sand mill is used in the organic solvent and cellulose acetate to disperse and then added to the dope.
  • the amount of the ultraviolet absorber used is preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.6 to 4% by mass with respect to the cellulose acetate film.
  • the film substrate of the present embodiment may further contain an antioxidant (deterioration inhibitor).
  • the antioxidant has a role of delaying or preventing the cellulose acetate film from being decomposed by a residual solvent amount of halogen in the cellulose acetate film, phosphoric acid of a phosphoric acid plasticizer, or the like.
  • hindered phenol compounds are preferably used.
  • 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-t-butyl) are used.
  • the film substrate When the film substrate is a cellulose ester film, the film substrate may contain a hindered amine compound.
  • the hindered amine compound functions as an antioxidant and has a structure having a bulky organic group (for example, a bulky branched alkyl group) in the vicinity of the N atom.
  • This is a known compound and is described, for example, in columns 5-11 of US Pat. No. 4,619,956 and columns 3-5 of US Pat. No. 4,839,405.
  • 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine compounds, or acid addition salts thereof or complexes of them with metal compounds are included.
  • Such compounds include those of the following general formula (H).
  • R1 and R2 are a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by R1 is not particularly limited, but a substituent bonded to the piperidine ring by a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom is preferable, and an amino group, hydroxyl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group which may have a substituent
  • An acyloxy group is more preferable, and an amino group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, or an acyloxy group having an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group as a substituent is more preferable.
  • the substituent represented by R2 is not particularly limited, but an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 12, particularly preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, Isopropyl group, tert-butyl group, n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl group, etc.), alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, More preferably, it is 2 to 12, particularly preferably 2 to 8, and examples thereof include vinyl group, allyl group, 2-butenyl group, 3-pentenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms) More preferably 2 to 12, particularly preferably 2 to 8, and examples thereof include a propargyl group and a 3-pentynyl group), an aryl group The number of carbon
  • 0 to 10 particularly preferably 0 to 6
  • examples thereof include an amino group, a methylamino group, a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a dibenzylamino group, and the like, and an alkoxy group (preferably The number of carbon atoms is 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 12, and particularly preferably 1 to 8, and examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group, and a cyclohexyloxy group.
  • hindered amines include 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1-allyl-4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1-benzyl-4-hydroxy -2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1- (4-tert-butyl-2-butenyl) -4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 4-stearoyloxy-2, 2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1-ethyl-4-salicyloyloxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 4-methacryloyloxy-1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl Piperidine, 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethylpiperidin-4-yl- ⁇ (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) -propionate, 1-benzyl 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidinyl maleate, (di-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine
  • examples include, but are not limited to, high molecular weight HALS in which a piperidine ring is bonded via an ester bond.
  • Mn molecular weight of 2,000 to 5,000 is preferred.
  • Examples of preferable hindered amine compounds include the following Specific Example 1 (Sunlizer HA-622, manufactured by Sort Co., Ltd.) and Specific Example 2.
  • CHIMASSORB 2020FDL (CAS-No. 192268-64-7), CHIMASSORB 944FDL (CAS-No. 71878-19-8), and TINUVIN 770DF manufactured by BASF (former Ciba Specialty Chemicals) (CAS-No. 52829-07-9), Siasorb UV-3346 (CAS-No. 82541-48-7) and Siasorb UV-3529 (CAS-No. 193098-40-7) manufactured by Sun Chemical Co., Ltd. It is suitable because it is commercially available and has excellent availability.
  • the above-mentioned hindered amine compound may be obtained commercially as described above, a synthetically produced compound may be used.
  • combining method of a hindered amine type compound It can synthesize
  • generation method the method using distillation, recrystallization, reprecipitation, and a filter agent and adsorption agent can be used suitably.
  • the commercially available products that are available on the market at low cost may be a mixture instead of the hindered amine compound alone, but in the present embodiment, the commercially available product is obtained by the production method, composition, melting point, acid value. It can be used regardless of the above.
  • the hindered amine compound used for the film substrate may be a low molecular weight polymer or a polymer having a repeating unit, but a hindered amine compound is provided in the vicinity of the interface between the active energy ray cured layer and the film substrate.
  • a high molecular weight is preferable for uneven distribution.
  • the compatibility with the film substrate for example, cellulose acylate
  • the haze of the film is increased.
  • the molecular weight of the hindered amine compound is preferably 300 to 100,000, more preferably 700 to 50,000, and particularly preferably 2,000 to 30,000.
  • the content of the hindered amine compound with respect to the film substrate is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 2% by mass, and 0.01% by mass.
  • the content is more preferably 1.5% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0.05% by mass or more and 1.0% by mass or less.
  • the content of the hindered amine compound is less than 0.001% by mass with respect to the film substrate, sufficient adhesion between the cured layer and the film substrate cannot be ensured.
  • the content of the hindered amine compound is 5% by mass or less, the hindered amine compound is less likely to bleed out, which is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the polarization performance of the polarizing plate.
  • a film base material is a cellulose-ester film
  • a film base material contains the polymer containing the repeating unit derived from the monomer represented by the following general formula (P).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 is not particularly limited, but is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
  • R 2 represents a substituent, and the substituent is preferably an aliphatic group or an aromatic group.
  • R 2 is not particularly limited, but the aliphatic group is preferably an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group or a cycloalkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group.
  • a butyl group is more preferable, and a methyl group and a t-butyl group are particularly preferable.
  • As the aromatic group a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a biphenyl group are preferable, and a phenyl group is particularly preferable.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 to 2, and more preferably 0 to 1. Note that when n is 0, the substituent R 2 does not exist, but in the chemical formula, this means that a hydrogen atom is sufficient.
  • (A) represents an atomic group necessary for forming a 5- or 6-membered ring, and is preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring in this specification is a concept including an aromatic ring containing no hetero atom and a saturated / unsaturated hetero ring containing a hetero atom.
  • the mass average molecular weight of the polymer represented by the general formula (P) is preferably 200 to 10,000, and more preferably 300 to 8,000. 400 to 4,000 is particularly preferable. From the effect of suppressing the moisture permeability and moisture content of the film, an improvement in compatibility with the cellulose acylate can be expected when it is not more than the upper limit.
  • the molecular weight and dispersity are values measured using a GPC (gel filtration chromatography) method, and the molecular weight can be measured by a polystyrene-reduced mass average molecular weight.
  • the addition amount of the polymer represented by the general formula (P) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin forming the film substrate, and 0.5 to The amount is more preferably 50 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 30 parts by mass.
  • the polymer of the present specification includes not only a polymer that is a general polymer compound in which a large number of monomers are polymerized, but also an oligomer that is a compound having a molecular weight of about several hundreds, in which several monomers are polymerized, for example. means. Unless otherwise specified, polymers, copolymers or copolymers are also included.
  • a film base material is a cellulose-ester film
  • a film base material contains an organic acid.
  • the molecular weight of the organic acid is preferably 200 to 1000, more preferably 250 to 800, and particularly preferably 280 to 500.
  • the organic acid preferably includes an aromatic ring structure, preferably includes an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably includes a phenyl group.
  • the aromatic ring structure of the organic acid may form a condensed ring with other rings.
  • the aromatic ring structure of the organic acid may have a substituent, but is preferably a halogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a halogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a chlorine atom. Or it is especially preferable that it is a methyl group.
  • the organic acid is preferably represented by the following general formula (Q) from the effect of this embodiment.
  • R 26 represents an aryl group
  • R 27 and R 28 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R 26 and R 27 may each have a substituent.
  • R 26 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a phenyl group.
  • R 27 and R 28 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group) or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • an alkyl group of 6 including a cycloalkyl group
  • a phenyl group and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a cyclohexane group or a phenyl group.
  • Specific examples of the organic acid represented by the general formula (Q) are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited to the following.
  • the content of the organic acid is preferably 1 to 20% by mass with respect to the cellulose ester.
  • a film base material is a cellulose-ester film
  • a film base material contains the compound represented by the following general formula (S).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 2 represents a substituent represented by the following general formula (a).
  • n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • n1 represents an integer of 2 or more
  • the plurality of R 1 may be the same as or different from each other.
  • n2 represents an integer of 1 to 5.
  • the plurality of R 2 may be the same as or different from each other.
  • A represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring.
  • R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a substituent represented by the following general formula (b).
  • R 5 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring.
  • n3 represents an integer of 0 to 10. When n3 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 5 and X may be the same as or different from each other.
  • X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring.
  • R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and R 9 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • n5 represents an integer of 1 to 11. When n5 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and X may be the same as or different from each other.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the compound represented by the general formula (S) is preferably from 200 to 1,200, more preferably from 250 to 1,000, and particularly preferably from 300 to 800.
  • the addition amount of the compound represented by the general formula (S) is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 0.1 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the film base material, and is preferably from 0.2 to 80 The amount is more preferably part by mass, and particularly preferably 0.3 to 60 parts by mass.
  • the film substrate preferably has a defect of 5 ⁇ m or more in diameter of 1 piece / 10 cm square or less. More preferably, it is 0.5 piece / 10 cm square or less, more preferably 0.1 piece / 10 cm square or less.
  • the diameter of the defect indicates the diameter when the defect is circular, and when the defect is not circular, the range of the defect is determined by observing with a microscope by the following method, and the maximum diameter (diameter of circumscribed circle) is determined.
  • the range of the defect is the size of the shadow when the defect is observed with the transmitted light of the differential interference microscope when the defect is a bubble or a foreign object.
  • the defect is a change in the surface shape such as transfer of a roller scratch or an abrasion
  • the size can be confirmed by observing the defect with the reflected light of a differential interference microscope.
  • the film When the number of defects is more than 1/10 cm square, for example, when a tension is applied to the film during processing in a later process, the film may be broken with the defect as a starting point and productivity may be reduced. Moreover, when the diameter of a defect becomes 5 micrometers or more, it can confirm visually by polarizing plate observation etc., and when used as an optical member, a bright spot may arise.
  • the coating film may not be formed uniformly, resulting in a defect (missing coating).
  • the defect is a void in the film (foaming defect) generated due to the rapid evaporation of the solvent in the drying process of the solution casting, a foreign matter in the film forming stock solution, or a foreign matter mixed in the film forming. This refers to the foreign matter (foreign matter defect) in the film.
  • the film base material preferably has a breaking elongation of at least one direction of 10% or more, more preferably 20% or more in the measurement based on JIS-K7127-1999.
  • the upper limit of the elongation at break is not particularly limited, but is practically about 250%. In order to increase the elongation at break, it is effective to suppress defects in the film caused by foreign matter and foaming.
  • the film substrate preferably has a total light transmittance of 90% or more, more preferably 92% or more. Moreover, as a realistic upper limit, it is about 99%.
  • the haze value is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 1.5% or less.
  • the total light transmittance and haze value can be measured according to JIS K7361 and JIS K7136.
  • the in-plane retardation value Ro of the film base is preferably 0 to 5 nm, and the retardation value Rth in the thickness direction is preferably in the range of ⁇ 10 to 10 nm. Further, Rth is preferably in the range of -5 to 5 nm. Alternatively, the retardation Ro is preferably in the range of 30 to 200 nm, and more preferably in the range of 30 to 90 nm. The retardation Rth in the thickness direction is preferably in the range of 70 to 300 nm.
  • the in-plane retardation Ro value is defined by the following formula (I), and the retardation value Rth in the thickness direction is defined by the following formula (II).
  • Formula (I) Ro (nx ⁇ ny) ⁇ d
  • Formula (II) Rth ⁇ (nx + ny) / 2 ⁇ nz ⁇ ⁇ d (Where nx is the refractive index in the slow axis direction in the plane of the film base, ny is the refractive index in the direction perpendicular to the slow axis in the plane of the film base, and nz is the thickness direction of the film base) (Refractive index, d represents the thickness (nm) of the film substrate, respectively)
  • the retardation can be obtained at a wavelength of 590 nm under an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH (relative humidity) using, for example, KOBRA-21ADH (manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments).
  • a cellulose ester film As a film forming method of the film substrate, a cellulose ester film will be described as an example, but the film forming method is not limited thereto.
  • a production method such as an inflation method, a T-die method, a calendar method, a cutting method, a casting method, an emulsion method, a hot press method, or the like can be used.
  • Organic solvent An organic solvent useful for forming a resin solution (dope composition) in the case of producing a cellulose ester film by a solution casting film forming method described later is one that can simultaneously dissolve a cellulose ester resin and other additives. Can be used without limitation.
  • a chlorinated organic solvent methylene chloride
  • a non-chlorinated organic solvent methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, amyl acetate, acetone, tetrahydrofuran, 1,3-dioxolane, 1,4-dioxane, cyclohexanone, ethyl formate, 2,2,2-trifluoroethanol, 2,2,3,3-hexafluoro-1-propanol, 1,3-difluoro-2-propanol, 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro- 2-methyl-2-propanol, 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-propanol, 2,2,3,3,3-pentafluoro-1-propanol, nitroethane, methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, iso-propanol, n-butanol, sec-butanol, tert-butan
  • Can, methylene chloride, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, may be used preferably acetone.
  • the solvent is preferably a dope composition in which a total of 15 to 45 mass% of cellulose ester resin and other additives are dissolved.
  • solution casting film forming method a step of preparing a dope by dissolving a resin and an additive in a solvent, a step of casting the dope on a belt-shaped or drum-shaped metal support, and drying the cast dope as a web It is carried out by a step of peeling off from the metal support, a step of stretching or maintaining the width, a step of further drying, and a step of winding up the finished cellulose ester film.
  • a stainless steel belt or a drum whose surface is plated with a casting is preferably used.
  • the width of the cast (casting) can be 1 to 4 m.
  • the surface temperature of the metal support in the casting process is set to ⁇ 50 ° C. to a temperature at which the solvent boils and does not foam. A higher temperature is preferred because the web can be dried faster, but if it is too high, the web may foam or the flatness may deteriorate.
  • a preferable support temperature is appropriately determined at 0 to 100 ° C., and more preferably 5 to 30 ° C.
  • the method for controlling the temperature of the metal support is not particularly limited, and there are a method of blowing warm air or cold air, and a method of contacting hot water with the back side of the metal support. It is preferable to use warm water because heat transfer is performed efficiently, so that the time until the temperature of the metal support becomes constant is short.
  • the residual solvent amount when peeling the web from the metal support is preferably 10 to 150% by mass, more preferably 20 to 40% by mass or 60 to 60%. It is 130% by mass, particularly preferably 20 to 30% by mass or 70 to 120% by mass.
  • M is the mass of the sample collected at any time during or after the production of the web or film
  • N is the mass after heating at 115 ° C. for 1 hour.
  • the web is peeled off from the metal support and dried to make the residual solvent amount 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0. -0.01 mass% or less.
  • a roller drying method (a method in which webs are alternately passed through a plurality of rollers arranged above and below) and a method in which the web is dried while being conveyed by a tenter method are employed.
  • the film in the stretching step, can be sequentially or simultaneously stretched in the longitudinal direction (MD direction) and the lateral direction (TD direction).
  • the draw ratios in the biaxial directions perpendicular to each other are preferably in the range of 1.0 to 2.0 times in the MD direction and 1.05 to 2.0 times in the TD direction, respectively. More preferably, it is carried out in the range of 1.0 to 1.5 times and 1.05 to 2.0 times in the TD direction.
  • a method of making a difference in peripheral speed between a plurality of rollers and stretching in the MD direction using the difference in peripheral speed of the roller between them, fixing both ends of the web with clips and pins, and widening the interval between the clips and pins in the traveling direction And a method of stretching in the MD direction, a method of stretching in the lateral direction and stretching in the TD direction, a method of stretching the MD direction and the TD direction simultaneously, and stretching in both directions.
  • a tenter it may be a pin tenter or a clip tenter.
  • the film transport tension in the film forming process such as a tenter is preferably 120 to 200 N / m, more preferably 140 to 200 N / m, and most preferably 140 to 160 N / m, although it depends on the temperature.
  • the stretching temperature is (Tg-30) to (Tg + 100) ° C., more preferably (Tg-20) to (Tg + 80) ° C., more preferably (Tg-5), where Tg is the glass transition temperature of the cellulose ester film. ⁇ (Tg + 20) ° C.
  • the Tg of the cellulose ester film can be controlled by the material type constituting the film and the ratio of the constituting materials.
  • the Tg when the cellulose ester film is dried is preferably 110 ° C. or higher, more preferably 120 ° C. or higher. Especially preferably, it is 150 degreeC or more.
  • the glass transition temperature is preferably 190 ° C. or lower, more preferably 170 ° C. or lower.
  • the Tg of the cellulose ester film can be determined by the method described in JIS K7121.
  • the stretching temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or more and the stretching ratio is 1.15 times or more because the surface is appropriately roughened. Roughening the surface of the cellulose ester film is preferable because it improves slipperiness and improves surface processability.
  • the film substrate may be formed by a melt casting film forming method.
  • a composition containing other additives such as a cellulose ester resin and a plasticizer is heated and melted to a temperature showing fluidity, and then a melt containing the fluid cellulose ester is cast. To do.
  • the melt extrusion method is preferable from the viewpoint of mechanical strength and surface accuracy. It is preferable that a plurality of raw materials used for melt extrusion are usually kneaded in advance and pelletized.
  • Pelletization may be performed by a known method, for example, dry cellulose ester, plasticizer, and other additives are fed to an extruder with a feeder, kneaded using a single or twin screw extruder, and formed into a strand from a die. Can be extruded, water-cooled or air-cooled, and then cut.
  • Additives may be mixed before being supplied to the extruder, or may be supplied by individual feeders.
  • a small amount of additives such as particles and antioxidants are preferably mixed in advance in order to mix uniformly.
  • the extruder is preferably processed at a temperature as low as possible so that it can be pelletized so that the shearing force is suppressed and the resin does not deteriorate (molecular weight reduction, coloring, gel formation, etc.).
  • a temperature as low as possible so that it can be pelletized so that the shearing force is suppressed and the resin does not deteriorate (molecular weight reduction, coloring, gel formation, etc.).
  • the resin does not deteriorate (molecular weight reduction, coloring, gel formation, etc.).
  • a twin screw extruder it is preferable to rotate in the same direction using a deep groove type screw. From the uniformity of kneading, the meshing type is preferable.
  • Film formation is performed using the pellets obtained as described above.
  • the raw material powder can be directly fed to the extruder by a feeder without being pelletized to form a film as it is.
  • the pellets are melted at a temperature of about 200 to 300 ° C, filtered through a leaf disk filter, etc. to remove foreign matter, and then formed into a film from the T die.
  • the cellulose ester film is formed by niping the film with a cooling roller and an elastic touch roller and solidifying the film on the cooling roller.
  • the extrusion flow rate is preferably adjusted stably by introducing a gear pump or the like.
  • a stainless fiber sintered filter is preferably used as a filter used for removing foreign substances.
  • the stainless steel fiber sintered filter is a united stainless steel fiber body that is intricately intertwined and compressed, and the contact points are sintered and integrated. The density of the fiber is changed depending on the thickness of the fiber and the amount of compression, and the filtration accuracy is improved. Can be adjusted.
  • Additives such as plasticizers and particles may be mixed with the resin in advance, or may be kneaded in the middle of the extruder. In order to add uniformly, it is preferable to use a mixing apparatus such as a static mixer.
  • the cellulose ester film temperature on the touch roller side when the cellulose ester film is nipped by the cooling roller and the elastic touch roller is preferably Tg or more (Tg + 110 ° C.) or less of the film.
  • a known roller can be used as the roller having an elastic surface used for such a purpose.
  • the elastic touch roller is also called a pinching rotator.
  • a commercially available elastic touch roller can also be used.
  • the cellulose ester film obtained as described above is stretched by the stretching operation after passing through the step of contacting the cooling roller.
  • the stretching method a known roller stretching machine or tenter can be preferably used.
  • the stretching temperature is usually preferably in the temperature range of Tg to (Tg + 60) ° C. of the resin constituting the film.
  • the end Before winding, the end may be slit and trimmed to the width of the product, and knurled (embossed) may be applied to both ends to prevent sticking and scratching during winding.
  • the knurling method can be performed by heating or pressurizing using a metal ring having an uneven pattern on the side surface.
  • the grip portion of the clip at both ends of the film is usually cut out and reused because the cellulose ester film is deformed and cannot be used as a product.
  • the ⁇ / 4 film can be produced by a method for producing an obliquely stretched film.
  • the method for producing an obliquely stretched film is a method for producing a stretched film having a slow axis at an angle of more than 0 ° and less than 90 ° with respect to the extending direction of the film.
  • the unstretched film before oblique stretching the cellulose ester film described above can be used.
  • the angle with respect to the extending direction of the film is an angle in the film plane. Since the slow axis is usually expressed in the stretching direction or a direction perpendicular to the stretching direction, stretching having such a slow axis is performed by stretching at an angle of more than 0 ° and less than 90 ° with respect to the extending direction of the film.
  • a film can be manufactured.
  • the angle between the film extension direction and the slow axis can be arbitrarily set to a desired angle in the range of more than 0 ° and less than 90 °, more preferably 10 ° to 80 °. °, more preferably 40 ° to 50 °.
  • the obliquely stretched film can be produced using an obliquely stretching apparatus (obliquely stretched tenter).
  • obliquely stretched tenter As an obliquely stretched tenter, the orientation angle of the film can be set freely by changing the rail pattern in various ways, and furthermore, the orientation axis of the film can be oriented with high precision evenly on the left and right across the width direction of the film.
  • An apparatus capable of controlling the film thickness and retardation with high accuracy can be preferably used.
  • the thickness of the film substrate is preferably 5 to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 5 to 80 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 5 to 34 ⁇ m.
  • the length of the film substrate is preferably 500 to 10000 m, more preferably 1000 to 8000 m. By setting it as the range of the said length, it is excellent in the processability in application
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the film substrate is preferably 2 to 10 nm, more preferably 2 to 5 nm.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra can be measured according to JIS B0601: 1994.
  • optical film of this embodiment can be provided with other layers such as an antireflection layer and a conductive layer.
  • the optical film of this embodiment can be used as an antireflection film having an external light antireflection function by coating an antireflection layer on a cured layer.
  • the antireflection layer is preferably laminated in consideration of the refractive index, the film thickness, the number of layers, the layer order, and the like so that the reflectance is reduced by optical interference.
  • the antireflection layer is composed of a low refractive index layer having a lower refractive index than the protective film as the support, or a combination of a high refractive index layer and a low refractive index layer having a higher refractive index than the protective film as the support. Preferably it is.
  • the low refractive index layer preferably contains silica-based fine particles, and the refractive index is preferably in the range of 1.30 to 1.45 when measured at 23 ° C. and wavelength of 550 nm.
  • the film thickness of the low refractive index layer is preferably in the range of 5 nm to 0.5 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 10 nm to 0.3 ⁇ m, and in the range of 30 nm to 0.2 ⁇ m. Most preferred.
  • the composition for forming a low refractive index layer preferably contains at least one kind of particles having an outer shell layer and porous or hollow inside as silica-based fine particles.
  • the particles having the outer shell layer and porous or hollow inside are preferably hollow silica-based fine particles.
  • the composition for forming a low refractive index layer may contain an organosilicon compound represented by the following general formula (OSi-1) or a hydrolyzate thereof, or a polycondensate thereof.
  • OSi-1) Si (OR) 4
  • R represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • tetramethoxysilane, tetraethoxysilane, tetraisopropoxysilane and the like are preferably used as the organosilicon compound represented by the general formula.
  • a compound having a thermosetting property and / or a photocurable property which mainly contains a fluorine-containing compound containing a fluorine atom in a range of 35 to 80% by mass and containing a crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group, has a low refractive index. You may make it contain in the composition for layer formation. Specifically, a fluorine-containing polymer or a fluorine-containing sol-gel compound is used.
  • fluorine-containing polymer examples include hydrolysates and dehydration condensates of perfluoroalkyl group-containing silane compounds [eg (heptadecafluoro-1,1,2,2-tetrahydrodecyl) triethoxysilane], and fluorine-containing monomers. Examples thereof include fluorine-containing copolymers having units and cross-linking reactive units as constituent units.
  • ⁇ High refractive index layer> In the high refractive index layer, it is preferable to adjust the refractive index to a range of 1.4 to 2.2 by measuring at 23 ° C. and a wavelength of 550 nm.
  • the thickness of the high refractive index layer is preferably 5 nm to 1 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 nm to 0.2 ⁇ m, and most preferably 30 nm to 0.1 ⁇ m. Adjustment of the refractive index can be achieved by adding metal oxide fine particles and the like.
  • the metal oxide fine particles used preferably have a refractive index of 1.80 to 2.60, more preferably 1.85 to 2.50.
  • the kind of metal oxide fine particles is not particularly limited, and Ti, Zr, Sn, Sb, Cu, Fe, Mn, Pb, Cd, As, Cr, Hg, Zn, Al, Mg, Si, P and S A metal oxide having at least one element selected from can be used.
  • a conductive layer may be formed on the cured layer.
  • a generally well-known conductive material can be used.
  • metal oxides such as indium oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide, gold, silver, and palladium can be used. These can be formed as a thin film on an optical film by a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, an ion plating method, a solution coating method, or the like.
  • a conductive material that is excellent in transparency and conductivity, and that has a main component of any one of indium oxide, tin oxide, and indium tin oxide obtained at a relatively low cost can be suitably used.
  • the thickness of the conductive layer varies depending on the material to be applied, it cannot be said unconditionally.
  • the surface resistivity is 1000 ⁇ or less, preferably 500 ⁇ or less, and considering the economy, A range of 10 nm or more, preferably 20 nm or more and 80 nm or less, preferably 70 nm or less is suitable. In such a thin film, visible light interference fringes due to uneven thickness of the conductive layer are unlikely to occur.
  • the polarizing plate can be produced by a general method. For example, an optical film is subjected to alkali saponification treatment, and the treated optical film is bonded to one surface of a polarizing film (polarizer) produced by immersing and stretching in an iodine solution using a completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution. Is preferred.
  • polarizer polarizing film
  • the optical film may be bonded to the other surface of the polarizer, or the above-described film substrate may be bonded.
  • the film thickness of the film substrate to be bonded to the other surface is preferably in the range of 5 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 5 to 34 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of adjusting smoothness and curl balance and further improving the effect of preventing winding deviation.
  • the polarizing film which is the main component of the polarizing plate, is an element that transmits only light having a polarization plane in a certain direction, and a typical polarizing film that is known at present is a polyvinyl alcohol polarizing film.
  • the polarizing film includes a polyvinyl alcohol film dyed with iodine and a dichroic dye dyed, but is not limited thereto.
  • polarizing film a polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution is formed and dyed by uniaxial stretching or dyeing, or after uniaxial stretching after dyeing, a film subjected to durability treatment with a boron compound is preferably used.
  • the thickness of the polarizing film is 5 to 30 ⁇ m, preferably 8 to 15 ⁇ m.
  • a polarizing plate is formed by bonding one side of the optical film of the present embodiment on the surface of the polarizing film. It is preferably bonded with an aqueous adhesive mainly composed of completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol or the like.
  • a circularly polarizing plate can also be constituted using an optical film. That is, a circularly polarizing plate can be formed by laminating a polarizing plate protective film, a polarizer, and a ⁇ / 4 film in this order. In this case, the angle formed between the slow axis of the ⁇ / 4 film and the absorption axis (or transmission axis) of the polarizing film is 45 °.
  • a long polarizing plate protective film, a long polarizer, and a long ⁇ / 4 film (long diagonally stretched film) are preferably laminated in this order.
  • the circularly polarizing plate can be produced by using a stretched polyvinyl alcohol doped with iodine or a dichroic dye as a polarizer, and laminating with a configuration of ⁇ / 4 film / polarizer.
  • the thickness of the polarizer is 5 to 40 ⁇ m, preferably 5 to 30 ⁇ m, particularly preferably 5 to 20 ⁇ m.
  • the circularly polarizing plate can be produced by a general method. In other words, it is preferable to attach an alkali saponified ⁇ / 4 film to one surface of a polarizer produced by immersing and stretching a polyvinyl alcohol film in an iodine solution, using a completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer used on one side of the film of the polarizing plate is preferably optically transparent and exhibits moderate viscoelasticity and pressure-sensitive adhesive properties.
  • the adhesive layer include adhesives or adhesives such as acrylic copolymers, epoxy resins, polyurethane, silicone polymers, polyethers, butyral resins, polyamide resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, and synthetic rubbers.
  • a film such as a drying method, a chemical curing method, a thermal curing method, a thermal melting method, a photocuring method, or the like can be formed and cured using a polymer such as the above.
  • the acrylic copolymer can be preferably used because it is most easy to control the physical properties of the adhesive and is excellent in transparency, weather resistance, durability and the like.
  • the optical film of this embodiment is preferable in that the performance excellent in visibility is exhibited by using it for an image display apparatus.
  • an image display device a reflection type, a transmission type, a transflective type liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device of various driving methods such as a TN type, an STN type, an OCB type, a VA type, an IPS type, and an ECB type, an organic EL display Examples thereof include a device and a plasma display.
  • a liquid crystal display device is preferable because of its high visibility.
  • Protective part may be arranged on the further viewing side of the cured layer of the optical film of the viewing side polarizing plate.
  • This protection part can be constituted by a front plate or a touch panel.
  • the said protection part is bonded together by the said hardened layer via the filler (photocurable resin) for filling the space
  • the front plate in particular of a protection part is not restrict
  • a solvent-free filler is preferable, and as commercially available products, for example, SVR1120, SVR1150, SVR1320 (above, manufactured by Dexerials Corporation), or HRJ-60, HRJ-302, HRJ-53 (above, Kyoritsu Chemical Industry) And the like).
  • SVR1120, SVR1150, SVR1320 above, manufactured by Dexerials Corporation
  • HRJ-60, HRJ-302, HRJ-53 above, Kyoritsu Chemical Industry
  • Bonding of the optical film and the front plate can be performed as follows, for example. First, a filler is prepared. Then, a filler is applied to the surface of the cured layer of the optical film, and the front plate is overlaid on the coating film of the filler. In this state, the filler is cured by light irradiation or the like, and the optical film and the front plate are bonded together. When the filler is applied to the surface of the cured layer, the surface free energy of the cured layer is set to 30 mN / m or more so that the filler is uniformly spread without being repelled at the end of the cured layer. An image display device that is maintained and has excellent visibility can be obtained.
  • Example 1 [Production of Cellulose Ester Film 1] ⁇ Preparation of silicon dioxide dispersion> Aerosil R812 (Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd., average primary particle diameter of 7 nm) 10 parts by mass Ethanol 90 parts by mass The above was stirred and mixed with a dissolver for 30 minutes, and then dispersed with Manton Gorin. 88 parts by mass of methylene chloride was added to the silicon dioxide dispersion while stirring, and the mixture was stirred and mixed for 30 minutes with a dissolver to prepare a silicon dioxide dispersion dilution. The mixture was filtered with a fine particle dispersion dilution filter (Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd .: polypropylene wind cartridge filter TCW-PPS-1N).
  • a fine particle dispersion dilution filter Advancedtech Toyo Co., Ltd .: polypropylene wind cartridge filter TCW-PPS-1N).
  • the belt was cast evenly on a stainless steel band support using a belt casting apparatus.
  • the solvent was evaporated until the residual solvent amount reached 100% by mass, and the stainless steel band support was peeled off.
  • the cellulose ester film web was evaporated at 35 ° C., slit to 1.15 m width, and dried at a drying temperature of 140 ° C. while being stretched 1.15 times in the TD direction (film width direction) with a tenter. I let you. Then, it was dried for 15 minutes while being transported in a drying device at 120 ° C.
  • the cellulose ester film 1 was obtained.
  • the cellulose ester film 1 had a film thickness of 15 ⁇ m and a winding length of 3900 m.
  • the following cured layer composition 1 is applied onto the A side (the surface not in contact with the casting belt) of the produced cellulose ester film 1 using an extrusion coater, and the constant rate drying zone temperature is 50 ° C., the rate of decrease.
  • the irradiance of the irradiated part is 100 mW / cm 2 using an ultraviolet lamp, and the irradiation amount is set to 0.
  • the coating layer was cured at 25 J / cm 2 to form a cured layer 1 having a dry film thickness of 5 ⁇ m, and wound into a roll to produce an optical film 1.
  • Hardened layer composition 1 >> ⁇ Composition of cured layer composition 1> (Resin (A)) M-8 (urethane acrylate: UA-1100, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) 90 parts by mass (photopolymerization initiator) Irgacure 184 (manufactured by BASF Japan) 5 parts by mass (additive) Silicone compound (BYK-UV3510, manufactured by BYK Japan) 1 part by mass (compound (B)) F-1 (biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid, molecular weight 198, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 10 parts by mass (solvent) Propylene glycol monomethyl ether 10 parts by weight Methyl acetate 30 parts by weight Methyl ethyl ketone 70 parts by weight
  • optical films 2 to 15 Except that the resin (A) and the compound (B) of the cured layer composition 1 of the optical film 1 were changed to the resin (A) and the compound (B) described in Table 1, respectively, in the same manner as the production of the optical film 1. Thus, optical films 2 to 15 were produced.
  • resin M-1 is 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
  • resin M-2 is 1,10-decanediol diacrylate.
  • A-DOD manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • Resin M′-1 is trimethylolpropane triacrylate (TMPTA, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • resin M′-2 is tricyclodecane dimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, Shin-Nakamura Industrial Co., Ltd.). Made).
  • TMPTA trimethylolpropane triacrylate
  • A-DCP Shin-Nakamura Industrial Co., Ltd.
  • compound F-2 is 2,2-biphenyldicarboxylic acid (molecular weight 242; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and compound F-3 is benzoic acid (molecular weight 122, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • Compound F-4 is 1,3,5-tris (4′-carboxy [1,1′-biphenyl] -4-yl) benzene (molecular weight 667, manufactured by Aldrich), and compound G-3 Is 1-benzyl-5-phenylbarbituric acid (molecular weight 294, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • Compound F′-1 is benzenesulfonic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), compound F′-2 is Tinuvin P (manufactured by Ciba Japan), and compound F′-3 is decanoic acid. (Manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • structural formulas of compounds F′-1, F′-2, and F′-3 are shown below.
  • optical films 16 and 17 In the cured layer composition 1 of the optical film 6, the optical film except that the sub resins A-1 and A-5 shown in Table 2 (see Chemical formula 33 and Chemical formula 34) were added in addition to the resin (A), respectively. Optical films 16 and 17 were produced in the same manner as in the production of 6.
  • ⁇ Evaluation ⁇ (1. Measurement of moisture permeability) According to JIS Z-0208, the moisture permeability (g / m 2 / 24h) of optical films 1 to 17 was measured in an environment of 80 ° C. and 90% RH, and evaluated according to the following criteria.
  • ⁇ Evaluation criteria> ⁇ : moisture permeability is less than 1300g / m 2 / 24h. ⁇ : moisture permeability is less than 1300g / m 2 / 24h or more 2000g / m 2 / 24h. ⁇ : moisture permeability is less than 2000g / m 2 / 24h or more 2500g / m 2 / 24h. ⁇ : it moisture permeability 2500g / m 2 / 24h or more.
  • the prepared optical films 1 to 17 were conditioned for 2 hours or more at a temperature of 23 ° C. and a relative humidity of 55%, and then specified by JIS K5400 with a weight of 500 g using a test pencil specified by JIS S 6006.
  • the pencil hardness of the cured layer was measured according to the pencil hardness evaluation method to be evaluated based on the following criteria. ⁇ Evaluation criteria> A: Pencil hardness is H or more. ⁇ : Pencil hardness is 0.5H or more and less than H. ⁇ : Pencil hardness is F or more and less than 0.5H ⁇ : Pencil hardness is less than F
  • Tables 1 and 2 show the evaluation results of the optical films 1 to 17 and the physical properties such as the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of the compound (B).
  • the alkali titration method described on pages 215 to 217 of the second edition of Experimental Chemistry Course published by Maruzen Co., Ltd. was adopted.
  • the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not contain a ring structure, and the spacer has a ring structure.
  • the optical film of the example having the compound (B) having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less has low moisture permeability (evaluation is 80 ° C. and 90% RH). Therefore, it can be said that a decrease in the durability of the polarizer can be suppressed by suppressing a decrease in the protective function of the polarizer in a high temperature and high humidity environment.
  • the compound (B) is a compound having a molecular weight of 130 to 500 (for example, F-2, G- 3) is desirable.
  • the above-mentioned effect is acquired by using the 15-micrometer-thick cellulose-ester film as a film base material. If the thickness of the film substrate is in the range of 5 ⁇ m or more and less than 35 ⁇ m, even if it is a film thickness other than 15 ⁇ m, there is no change to the thin film, so that the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Guessed.
  • optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device of the present embodiment described above can be expressed as follows.
  • An optical film having a cured layer on at least one surface of a transparent substrate The transparent substrate is a cellulose film having a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m or more and less than 35 ⁇ m,
  • the cured layer is At least one kind of active energy ray-curable resin (A), wherein the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not contain a ring structure;
  • An optical film comprising a ring structure and at least one compound (B) having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less.
  • the cellulose-based film is a cellulose ester film, and a polymer containing a repeating unit derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (P), an organic acid represented by the following general formula (Q), 3.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 2 represents a substituent.
  • (A) is necessary for forming a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • R 26 represents an aryl group
  • R 27 and R 28 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 2 represents a substituent represented by the following general formula (a).
  • N1 represents an integer of 0 to 4, and n1 is 2
  • a plurality of R 1 may be the same or different from each other
  • n2 represents an integer of 1 to 5
  • a plurality of R 2 may be the same or different from each other May be.
  • A represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or the following general formula (b
  • R 5 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms
  • X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring
  • n3 represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the plurality of R 5 and X may be the same or different.
  • X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring
  • R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , and R 9 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • N5 represents an integer of 1 to 11, and when n5 is 2 or more, a plurality of R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and X may be the same or different.
  • optical film as described in any one of 1 to 3, wherein two or more hardened layers are provided.
  • a polarizing plate wherein the optical film according to any one of 1 to 4 is bonded to one surface of a polarizer.
  • the optical film of the present invention can be used for image display devices such as polarizing plates and liquid crystal display devices.
  • Image display device Liquid crystal cell (display cell) 5 Polarizing plate 11 Polarizer 12 Film substrate (transparent substrate, cellulose film) 13 Hardened layer 15 Optical film

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)

Abstract

An optical film (15) is equipped with a cured layer (13) that is provided on at least one surface of a transparent substrate (a film substrate (12)). The transparent substrate is a cellulose film having a film thickness of 5 μm or more and less than 35 μm. The cured layer (13) contains at least one active-energy-ray-curable resin (A) and at least one compound (B). The active-energy-ray-curable resin (A) is a resin in which a spacer that links two active energy groups to each other has up to 8 linearly arranged atoms and the spacer contains no ring structure. The compound (B) is a compound having a ring structure and having a first acid dissociation constant pKa1 of 1.0 to 7.0 inclusive.

Description

光学フィルム、偏光板および画像表示装置Optical film, polarizing plate and image display device
 本発明は、透明基材の少なくとも一方の面に硬化層を有する光学フィルムと、その光学フィルムを有する偏光板と、その偏光板を有する画像表示装置とに関するものである。 The present invention relates to an optical film having a cured layer on at least one surface of a transparent substrate, a polarizing plate having the optical film, and an image display device having the polarizing plate.
 画像表示装置の1種である液晶表示装置(LCD)は、薄型、軽量で、かつ消費電力が小さいことから、広く使用されている。液晶表示装置は、液晶セルおよび偏光板を含んでおり、液晶層を2枚の基板(例えばガラス基板)で挟んだ液晶セルを、2枚の偏光板で挟んで構成される。偏光板は、通常、セルロース系フィルムと、偏光膜(偏光子)とを積層して構成されており、ポリビニルアルコールフィルムからなる偏光膜をヨウ素にて染色して延伸し、その両面にセルロース系フィルムを積層することで構成される。 A liquid crystal display (LCD), which is one type of image display device, is widely used because it is thin, lightweight, and consumes little power. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal cell and a polarizing plate, and includes a liquid crystal cell sandwiched between two substrates (for example, a glass substrate) and sandwiched between two polarizing plates. The polarizing plate is usually constituted by laminating a cellulose film and a polarizing film (polarizer). The polarizing film made of a polyvinyl alcohol film is dyed with iodine and stretched, and the cellulose film is formed on both surfaces thereof. It is comprised by laminating.
 セルロース系フィルムは、フィルム自体のコシが強く、偏光板の製造過程において取扱性が高いことや、偏光板化してパネル(液晶セル)に貼合した後のリワーク性が高いことから、保護フィルムとしての要望は強い。しかし、セルロース系フィルムは吸湿性が高く、偏光子は水分によって劣化しやすいことから、セルロース系フィルム単独では、偏光子の保護機能が足りない。 Cellulose film is strong as the film itself, and has high handleability in the manufacturing process of polarizing plates, and has high reworkability after being made into polarizing plates and bonded to panels (liquid crystal cells). The demand is strong. However, since the cellulose film has high hygroscopicity and the polarizer is easily deteriorated by moisture, the cellulose film alone does not have sufficient protective function for the polarizer.
 そこで、例えば特許文献1および2では、セルロースアシレートフィルム上に、環構造を持つ化合物を有する樹脂組成物を用いて硬化層を形成することにより、フィルム全体を低透湿化し、これによって偏光子の保護機能を向上させるようにした保護フィルムが提案されている。なお、上記セルロースアシレートフィルムとしては、特許文献1では膜厚が80μmのものが用いられており、特許文献2では膜厚が60μmのものが用いられている。 Therefore, in Patent Documents 1 and 2, for example, a cured layer is formed on a cellulose acylate film using a resin composition having a compound having a ring structure, thereby reducing the moisture permeability of the entire film, and thereby a polarizer. There has been proposed a protective film that improves the protective function. As the cellulose acylate film, a film having a film thickness of 80 μm is used in Patent Document 1, and a film having a film thickness of 60 μm is used in Patent Document 2.
特開2006-83225号公報(請求項1~3、段落〔0005〕、〔0007〕、〔0013〕、〔0057〕等参照)JP 2006-83225 A (see claims 1 to 3, paragraphs [0005], [0007], [0013], [0057], etc.) 特開2014-95890号公報(請求項1、10、段落〔0006〕、〔0007〕、〔0031〕、〔0236〕等参照)Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2014-95890 (see claims 1 and 10, paragraphs [0006], [0007], [0031], [0236], etc.)
 ところで、最近の中小型液晶ディスプレイ市場では、表示性能の向上やディスプレイの薄型化のため、偏光板の薄型化が要求されており、偏光子および保護フィルムの薄膜化が要求されている。また、中小型の液晶ディスプレイの使用状況も近年多様化しており、例えば高温高湿の過酷な環境下での使用も増えつつある。 By the way, in the recent small and medium size liquid crystal display market, in order to improve display performance and to make the display thinner, it is required to make the polarizing plate thinner, and the polarizer and the protective film are required to be made thinner. In addition, the use situation of medium- and small-sized liquid crystal displays has been diversified in recent years. For example, the use in a severe environment of high temperature and high humidity is increasing.
 しかし、偏光子の薄膜化が進むと、偏光子の耐久性が劣化する。加えて、保護フィルム(特にフィルム基材)を薄膜化した場合、高温高湿環境下では、保護フィルムの透湿度が大幅に上がって、偏光子の保護機能が低下するため、偏光子の耐久性がさらに劣化する。このため、フィルム基材が薄膜であっても、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇を抑えて、偏光子の保護機能の低下を抑えることができる保護フィルムが求められている。 However, the durability of the polarizer deteriorates as the polarizer becomes thinner. In addition, when the protective film (especially the film base material) is made thin, the moisture permeability of the protective film increases significantly and the protective function of the polarizer decreases in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment. Deteriorates further. For this reason, even if a film base material is a thin film, the protective film which can suppress the raise of the water vapor transmission rate in a high temperature, high humidity environment, and can suppress the fall of the protective function of a polarizer is calculated | required.
 この点、特許文献1および2の保護フィルムは、膜厚が80μmまたは60μmの厚膜のフィルム基材を用いて構成されており、フィルム基材が薄膜(例えば膜厚35μm未満)の構成で、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇を抑えて、偏光子の保護機能の低下を抑えるものではない。 In this regard, the protective films of Patent Documents 1 and 2 are configured using a film base having a thickness of 80 μm or 60 μm, and the film base is a thin film (for example, a thickness of less than 35 μm), It does not suppress an increase in moisture permeability in a high temperature and high humidity environment, and does not suppress a decrease in the protective function of the polarizer.
 本発明は、上記の問題を解決するためになされたものであって、その目的は、薄膜のセルロース系フィルム上に硬化層を形成した構成で、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇を抑えることができ、これによって、偏光板の保護フィルムに適用した場合でも、偏光子の保護機能の低下を抑えることができる光学フィルムと、その光学フィルムを有する偏光板と、その偏光板を有する画像表示装置とを提供することにある。 The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and its purpose is to increase the moisture permeability in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment with a configuration in which a cured layer is formed on a thin cellulose-based film. Even when applied to a protective film for a polarizing plate, an optical film capable of suppressing a decrease in the protective function of the polarizer, a polarizing plate having the optical film, and an image having the polarizing plate It is to provide a display device.
 本願発明者らは、薄膜のセルロース系フィルム基材の少なくとも一方の面に、下記構成の硬化層を形成することで、前記課題を解決できることを見出し、本発明に至った次第である。すなわち、本発明の上記目的は、以下の構成により達成される。 The inventors of the present application have found that the above-mentioned problems can be solved by forming a cured layer having the following constitution on at least one surface of a thin cellulose-based film substrate. That is, the above object of the present invention is achieved by the following configuration.
 本発明の一側面に係る光学フィルムは、透明基材の少なくとも一方の面に硬化層を有する光学フィルムであって、
 前記透明基材は、膜厚が5μm以上35μm未満のセルロース系フィルムであり、
 前記硬化層が、
 2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の最大の数が8以上であり、かつ、前記スペーサに環構造を含まない、少なくとも1種の活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)と、
 環構造を有し、かつ、第1酸解離定数pKa1が1.0以上7.0以下である少なくとも1種の化合物(B)とを含有している。
An optical film according to one aspect of the present invention is an optical film having a cured layer on at least one surface of a transparent substrate,
The transparent substrate is a cellulose film having a film thickness of 5 μm or more and less than 35 μm,
The cured layer is
At least one kind of active energy ray-curable resin (A), wherein the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not contain a ring structure; ,
And at least one compound (B) having a ring structure and having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less.
 上記光学フィルムの構成によれば、膜厚が5μm以上35μm未満の薄膜のセルロース系フィルム上に形成される硬化層が、特定の樹脂と特定の化合物とを含有していることにより、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇を抑えることができる。これにより、上記光学フィルムを偏光板の保護フィルムに適用した場合でも、偏光子の保護機能の低下を抑えることができ、偏光子の耐久性低下を抑えることができる。 According to the configuration of the optical film, the cured layer formed on the thin cellulose film having a film thickness of 5 μm or more and less than 35 μm contains the specific resin and the specific compound. The increase in moisture permeability under the environment can be suppressed. Thereby, even when the said optical film is applied to the protective film of a polarizing plate, the fall of the protective function of a polarizer can be suppressed and the durable fall of a polarizer can be suppressed.
本発明の実施の形態に係る画像表示装置の概略の構成を示す断面図である。1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of an image display device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 上記画像表示装置の偏光板に適用される光学フィルムの構成を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the structure of the optical film applied to the polarizing plate of the said image display apparatus.
 本発明の実施の一形態について、図面に基づいて説明すれば以下の通りである。なお、本明細書において、数値範囲をA~Bと表記した場合、その数値範囲に下限Aおよび上限Bの値は含まれるものとする。また、本発明は、以下の内容に限定されるものではない。 An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this specification, when the numerical range is expressed as A to B, the numerical value range includes the values of the lower limit A and the upper limit B. The present invention is not limited to the following contents.
 本願発明者らは、膜厚が5μm以上35μm未満の薄膜のセルロース系フィルム上に硬化層を形成した光学フィルムにおいて、上記硬化層に、2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の最大の数(以下、直鎖最大原子数とも言う)が8以上であり、かつ、前記スペーサに環構造を含まない、少なくとも1種の活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)(以下、単に「硬化性樹脂(A)」とも記載する)と、環構造を有し、かつ、第1酸解離定数pKa1が特定範囲の化合物(B)とを含有させることにより、上記課題を解決できることを見出した。上記課題を解決できる理由は、以下のように推定している。 In the optical film in which a cured layer is formed on a thin cellulose-based film having a film thickness of 5 μm or more and less than 35 μm, the inventors of the present application form atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups to the cured layer. Is at least one active energy ray-curable resin (A) (hereinafter simply referred to as “the number of linear maximum atoms”) and 8 or less, and the spacer does not contain a ring structure. It is also found that the above-mentioned problem can be solved by including a curable resin (A) ”and a compound having a ring structure and a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 in a specific range (B). It was. The reason why the above problem can be solved is estimated as follows.
 硬化性樹脂(A)と化合物(B)とを含有する硬化層は、硬化性樹脂(A)と化合物(B)とを含有する硬化層組成物(塗工液)を作製して、セルロース系フィルム上に塗布し、活性エネルギー線の照射によって塗布層を硬化させることによって形成される。硬化性樹脂(A)は、極性基をもつ活性エネルギー基を含有しており、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇の原因となる。そこで、第1酸解離定数pKa1が1.0以上7.0以下である極性基をもつ化合物(B)を添加することで、化合物(B)の極性基が硬化性樹脂(A)の活性エネルギー基と相互作用し、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇の原因となる極性箇所を減少させることができる。また、2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の最大の数が8以上であり、かつ、前記スペーサに環構造を含まない硬化性樹脂(A)は、立体障害なく、化合物(B)と相互作用することができ、隙間がない硬化膜を形成できる。その結果、塗布層を硬化させて硬化層を形成したときに、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇を抑えることができる。 The cured layer containing the curable resin (A) and the compound (B) is prepared by preparing a cured layer composition (coating liquid) containing the curable resin (A) and the compound (B), and is cellulose-based. It is formed by coating on a film and curing the coating layer by irradiation with active energy rays. The curable resin (A) contains an active energy group having a polar group, which causes an increase in moisture permeability in a high temperature and high humidity environment. Therefore, by adding the compound (B) having a polar group having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less, the polar group of the compound (B) is activated by the activity of the curable resin (A). It is possible to reduce polar portions that interact with the energy group and cause an increase in moisture permeability in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment. The curable resin (A) in which the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more and the spacer does not contain a ring structure is a compound having no steric hindrance. A cured film that can interact with (B) and has no gaps can be formed. As a result, when the coating layer is cured to form a cured layer, an increase in moisture permeability under a high temperature and high humidity environment can be suppressed.
 上述した本実施形態の効果を確実に得る観点から、硬化性樹脂(A)において、直鎖最大原子数は10以上であることが好ましく、11以上であることがさらに好ましい。また、直鎖最大原子数が25を超えると、硬化層として所定の硬度が得られにくくなることから、直鎖最大原子数の上限は25であることが好ましい。また、硬化性樹脂(A)において、どの2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサについても、上記スペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の数は、8以上であることが好ましく、10以上であることがより好ましく、11以上であることがさらに好ましい。 From the viewpoint of surely obtaining the effect of the present embodiment described above, in the curable resin (A), the maximum number of linear atoms is preferably 10 or more, and more preferably 11 or more. Moreover, since it will become difficult to obtain predetermined | prescribed hardness as a hardened layer when a linear maximum atom number exceeds 25, it is preferable that the upper limit of a linear maximum atom number is 25. In the curable resin (A), the number of atoms arranged in a straight line as the spacer is preferably 8 or more, and more preferably 10 or more, for any spacer connecting any two active energy groups. Preferably, it is 11 or more.
 なお、第1酸解離定数pKa1が1.0を下回ると、化合物(B)の極性が高すぎて、硬化層が水分を吸収しやすくなるため、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇を抑えることが困難となる。一方、第1酸解離定数pKa1が7.0を上回ると、化合物(B)の極性が低すぎて、硬化性樹脂(A)の活性エネルギー基の極性箇所と相互作用しなくなり、高温高湿環境下での透湿度の上昇を抑えることが困難となる。第1酸解離定数pKa1の好ましい範囲は、2.0以上6.0以下であり、さらに好ましい範囲は、2.5以上5.5以下である。 When the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 is less than 1.0, the polarity of the compound (B) is too high and the cured layer easily absorbs moisture, so that the moisture permeability increases in a high temperature and high humidity environment. It becomes difficult to suppress this. On the other hand, when the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 exceeds 7.0, the polarity of the compound (B) is too low to interact with the polar part of the active energy group of the curable resin (A), and the high temperature and high humidity It becomes difficult to suppress an increase in moisture permeability under the environment. A preferred range of the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 is 2.0 or more and 6.0 or less, and a more preferred range is 2.5 or more and 5.5 or less.
 また、低分子量の添加剤(化合物(B))は、ブリードしやすく、これによって透湿性能が劣化しやすいことから、化合物(B)の分子量は130以上であることが好ましい。一方、高分子量の添加剤は、樹脂の架橋率が悪くなって透湿性能が劣化しやすいことから、化合物(B)の分子量は500以下であることが好ましい。 In addition, the low molecular weight additive (compound (B)) is likely to bleed and the moisture permeation performance is likely to be deteriorated thereby, so that the molecular weight of the compound (B) is preferably 130 or more. On the other hand, since the high molecular weight additive tends to deteriorate the cross-linking rate of the resin and deteriorate the moisture permeability, the molecular weight of the compound (B) is preferably 500 or less.
 また、セルロース系フィルムがセルロースエステルフィルムの場合、偏光子の劣化抑制に優れる点から、セルロースエステルフィルムに、特定の有機酸、フェノール化合物、または主鎖にベンゼン環を含む化合物を添加することが、本発明の好ましい態様である。 In addition, when the cellulose-based film is a cellulose ester film, it is possible to add a specific organic acid, a phenol compound, or a compound containing a benzene ring in the main chain to the cellulose ester film, because it is excellent in suppressing deterioration of the polarizer. This is a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
 以下、本実施形態の光学フィルムが適用される画像表示装置の具体的な構成について説明する。 Hereinafter, a specific configuration of the image display device to which the optical film of the present embodiment is applied will be described.
 〔画像表示装置の構成〕
 図1は、本実施形態の画像表示装置1の概略の構成を示す断面図である。画像表示装置1は、例えば液晶表示装置であり、液晶表示パネル2の後述する偏光板5(特に後述する光学フィルム15上)に、充填層31を介して保護部3を貼り合わせて構成されている。充填層31は、アクリルなどの光硬化性樹脂からなる接着層(空隙充填剤)であり、液晶表示パネル2の偏光板5の表面全体に形成されている。保護部3は、液晶表示パネル2の表面を保護するものであり、例えばアクリル樹脂やガラスからなる前面板で構成される。なお、前面板の代わりにタッチパネル(静電容量方式や抵抗膜方式など)を上記の保護部3として用いてもよい。
[Configuration of image display device]
FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a schematic configuration of an image display device 1 according to the present embodiment. The image display device 1 is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is configured by bonding a protective portion 3 to a polarizing plate 5 (particularly on an optical film 15 described later) of the liquid crystal display panel 2 via a filling layer 31. Yes. The filling layer 31 is an adhesive layer (void filler) made of a photocurable resin such as acrylic, and is formed on the entire surface of the polarizing plate 5 of the liquid crystal display panel 2. The protection unit 3 protects the surface of the liquid crystal display panel 2 and is formed of a front plate made of acrylic resin or glass, for example. Note that a touch panel (such as a capacitance method or a resistance film method) may be used as the protection unit 3 instead of the front plate.
 液晶表示パネル2は、液晶層を一対の基板で挟持した液晶セル4(表示セル)の両側に、偏光板5・6をそれぞれ配置して構成されている。偏光板5は、粘着層7を介して液晶セル4の一方の面側(例えば視認側)に貼り付けられている。偏光板6は、粘着層8を介して液晶セル4の他方の面側(例えばバックライト9側)に貼り付けられている。液晶表示パネル2の駆動方式は特に限定されず、IPS(In Plane Switching)型式、TN(Twisted Nematic)方式など、様々な駆動方式を採用することができる。 The liquid crystal display panel 2 is configured by disposing polarizing plates 5 and 6 on both sides of a liquid crystal cell 4 (display cell) in which a liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between a pair of substrates. The polarizing plate 5 is attached to one surface side (for example, the viewing side) of the liquid crystal cell 4 via the adhesive layer 7. The polarizing plate 6 is attached to the other surface side (for example, the backlight 9 side) of the liquid crystal cell 4 through the adhesive layer 8. The driving method of the liquid crystal display panel 2 is not particularly limited, and various driving methods such as an IPS (In Plane Switching) type and a TN (Twisted Nematic) method can be employed.
 偏光板5は、所定の直線偏光を透過する偏光子11と、偏光子11の保護部3側に順に積層されるフィルム基材12および硬化層13と、偏光子11の液晶セル4側に積層される光学フィルム14とで構成されている。フィルム基材12と硬化層13とで、偏光子11の視認側の面に形成される保護フィルムとしての光学フィルム15が構成されている。フィルム基材12は、セルロース系フィルムからなる透明基材である。セルロース系フィルムとしては、後述するセルロースエーテルフィルムやセルロースエステルフィルムが挙げられる。フィルム基材12上に硬化層13を設けることにより、偏光板5の表面を保護することができる。 The polarizing plate 5 includes a polarizer 11 that transmits predetermined linearly polarized light, a film substrate 12 and a cured layer 13 that are sequentially stacked on the protective portion 3 side of the polarizer 11, and a liquid crystal cell 4 side of the polarizer 11. The optical film 14 is made up of. The film base 12 and the cured layer 13 constitute an optical film 15 as a protective film formed on the surface on the viewing side of the polarizer 11. The film substrate 12 is a transparent substrate made of a cellulose film. Examples of the cellulose film include a cellulose ether film and a cellulose ester film described later. By providing the cured layer 13 on the film substrate 12, the surface of the polarizing plate 5 can be protected.
 フィルム基材12の膜厚は、5μm以上35μm未満である。フィルム基材12を薄膜化することで、光学フィルム15および偏光板5を薄膜化することができ、画像表示装置1全体の薄型化に寄与できる。 The film thickness of the film substrate 12 is 5 μm or more and less than 35 μm. By making the film substrate 12 thinner, the optical film 15 and the polarizing plate 5 can be made thinner, which can contribute to the thinning of the entire image display device 1.
 硬化層13は、図1のように単層で構成されていてもよいが、フィルム基材12上に2層以上積層されていてもよい。例えば、図2に示すように、硬化層13は、フィルム基材12側から、第1の硬化層13aと、第2の硬化層13bとを積層して構成されていてもよい。このように、硬化層13を複数層積層することにより、耐擦傷性を向上させることができ、光学フィルム15による偏光板5の表面保護を確実に図ることができる。 The cured layer 13 may be composed of a single layer as shown in FIG. 1, but two or more layers may be laminated on the film substrate 12. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the cured layer 13 may be configured by laminating a first cured layer 13a and a second cured layer 13b from the film base 12 side. Thus, by laminating a plurality of hardened layers 13, the scratch resistance can be improved, and the surface protection of the polarizing plate 5 by the optical film 15 can be reliably achieved.
 光学フィルム14は、偏光板5の裏面を保護するために設けられている。光学フィルム14は、フィルム基材12と同様の材料(例えばセルロース系フィルム)で構成されてもよいし、他の材料で構成されてもよい。 The optical film 14 is provided to protect the back surface of the polarizing plate 5. The optical film 14 may be made of the same material as the film base 12 (for example, a cellulose film), or may be made of other materials.
 上記のフィルム基材12は、λ/4フィルムで構成されていてもよい。λ/4フィルムは、透過光に対して波長の1/4程度の面内位相差を付与する層であり、本実施形態では、斜め延伸が施されたフィルムで構成されている。λ/4フィルムの遅相軸と偏光子11の吸収軸とのなす角度(交差角)は、30°~60°であり、これによって、偏光子11からの直線偏光は、λ/4フィルム(フィルム基材12)によって円偏光または楕円偏光に変換される。 The film substrate 12 may be composed of a λ / 4 film. The λ / 4 film is a layer that imparts in-plane retardation of about ¼ of the wavelength to transmitted light, and in the present embodiment, the λ / 4 film is composed of a film that is obliquely stretched. The angle (crossing angle) formed between the slow axis of the λ / 4 film and the absorption axis of the polarizer 11 is 30 ° to 60 °, whereby the linearly polarized light from the polarizer 11 is converted into the λ / 4 film ( It is converted into circularly polarized light or elliptically polarized light by the film substrate 12).
 したがって、観察者が偏光サングラスを装着して表示画像を観察する場合において、偏光子11の透過軸(吸収軸に垂直)と、偏光サングラスの透過軸とがどのようにズレていても、偏光板5から出射される光(円偏光または楕円偏光)に含まれる、偏光サングラスの透過軸に平行な光の成分を観察者の眼に導くことができる。これにより、観察する角度によって表示画像が見え難くなるのを抑えることができる。また、観察者が偏光サングラスを装着しない場合でも、偏光板5から出射されて観察者の眼に入射するのは円偏光または楕円偏光であるので、直線偏光が観察者の眼に直接入射する構成に比べて、観察者の眼の負担を軽減することができる。 Therefore, when an observer wears polarized sunglasses and observes a display image, the polarizing plate can be used regardless of how the transmission axis of the polarizer 11 (perpendicular to the absorption axis) and the transmission axis of the polarized sunglasses are misaligned. The light component parallel to the transmission axis of the polarized sunglasses contained in the light emitted from 5 (circularly polarized light or elliptically polarized light) can be guided to the eyes of the observer. Thereby, it can suppress that it becomes difficult to see a display image with the angle to observe. In addition, even when the observer does not wear polarized sunglasses, since it is circularly polarized light or elliptically polarized light that is emitted from the polarizing plate 5 and incident on the observer's eyes, linearly polarized light is directly incident on the observer's eyes. Compared to the above, the burden on the eyes of the observer can be reduced.
 上記のフィルム基材12は、ヒンダードアミン系化合物を含有してもよい。フィルム基材12上に硬化層13を形成した光学フィルム15は、例えば紫外線照射によって偏光子11に接着(UV接着)されるが、このときのUV照射によって、フィルム基材12と硬化層13との密着性(耐光密着性)が悪くなることがある。しかし、フィルム基材12にヒンダードアミン系化合物を含有させることにより、上記の耐光密着性を改善することができる。 The film substrate 12 may contain a hindered amine compound. The optical film 15 having the cured layer 13 formed on the film substrate 12 is adhered (UV adhesion) to the polarizer 11 by, for example, ultraviolet irradiation. By this UV irradiation, the film substrate 12 and the cured layer 13 are bonded to each other. The adhesiveness (light-resistant adhesiveness) may deteriorate. However, when the film base 12 contains a hindered amine compound, the above light-resistant adhesion can be improved.
 また、フィルム基材12は、高温高湿下や高温低湿下での偏光子11の劣化を抑えるために、特定の有機酸、特定のフェノール化合物、または主鎖にベンゼン環を含む特定の重合体を含有してもよい。 The film substrate 12 is a specific polymer containing a specific organic acid, a specific phenol compound, or a main chain containing a benzene ring in order to suppress deterioration of the polarizer 11 under high temperature and high humidity or high temperature and low humidity. It may contain.
 なお、上記のヒンダードアミン系化合物や特定の有機酸等の詳細については、後述する。 The details of the above hindered amine compounds and specific organic acids will be described later.
 偏光板6は、所定の直線偏光を透過する偏光子21と、偏光子21の液晶セル4側に配置される光学フィルム22と、偏光子21の液晶セル4とは反対側に配置される光学フィルム23とを積層して構成されている。偏光子21は、透過軸が偏光子11と垂直となるように配置されている(クロスニコル状態)。光学フィルム22・23は、偏光板6の表面および裏面を保護するために設けられているが、これらは偏光板5のフィルム基材12と同様の材料(例えばセルロース系フィルム)で構成されてもよいし、他の材料で構成されてもよい。 The polarizing plate 6 includes a polarizer 21 that transmits predetermined linearly polarized light, an optical film 22 that is disposed on the liquid crystal cell 4 side of the polarizer 21, and an optical that is disposed on the opposite side of the polarizer 21 from the liquid crystal cell 4. The film 23 is laminated. The polarizer 21 is disposed so that the transmission axis is perpendicular to the polarizer 11 (crossed Nicol state). The optical films 22 and 23 are provided to protect the front and back surfaces of the polarizing plate 6, but they may be made of the same material as the film substrate 12 of the polarizing plate 5 (for example, a cellulose film). It may be made of other materials.
 なお、上記した光学フィルム15は、偏光板以外の用途に用いることも可能である。この場合、硬化層13はフィルム基材12の両面に設けられてもよい。したがって、光学フィルム15においては、硬化層13はフィルム基材12の少なくとも一方の面に形成されていてもよいと言える。 In addition, the above-described optical film 15 can be used for purposes other than the polarizing plate. In this case, the cured layer 13 may be provided on both surfaces of the film substrate 12. Therefore, in the optical film 15, it can be said that the cured layer 13 may be formed on at least one surface of the film substrate 12.
 〔光学フィルム〕
 以下、上述した光学フィルム15の詳細について説明する。
[Optical film]
Hereinafter, the detail of the optical film 15 mentioned above is demonstrated.
 (硬化層)
 〈活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)〉
 本実施形態の硬化層は、2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の最大の数が8以上であり、かつ、前記スペーサに環構造を含まない、少なくとも1種の活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)を含有している。
(Cured layer)
<Active energy ray-curable resin (A)>
The cured layer of this embodiment has at least one active energy in which the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not include a ring structure. It contains a linear curable resin (A).
 活性エネルギー基とは、紫外線や電子線、熱などの活性エネルギー線により硬化できる反応基であり、具体的には、アクリロイル基、エポキシド、オキセタン、イソシアネート基、ビニル基などがある。 The active energy group is a reactive group that can be cured by active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays, electron beams, and heat, and specifically includes an acryloyl group, an epoxide, an oxetane, an isocyanate group, and a vinyl group.
 活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂とは、紫外線や電子線のような活性エネルギー線(活性線ともいう)照射により、架橋反応を経て硬化する樹脂である。活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂としては、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有するモノマーを含む成分が好ましく用いられる。エチレン性不飽和二重結合基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、スチリル基、アリル基等の重合性官能基が挙げられ、中でも、(メタ)アクリロイル基及び-C(O)OCH=CH2が好ましい。 The active energy ray-curable resin is a resin that is cured through a crosslinking reaction by irradiation with active energy rays (also referred to as active rays) such as ultraviolet rays and electron beams. As the active energy ray curable resin, a component containing a monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond is preferably used. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated double bond group include polymerizable functional groups such as (meth) acryloyl group, vinyl group, styryl group and allyl group. Among them, (meth) acryloyl group and —C (O) OCH═ CH 2 is preferred.
 本実施形態において、活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)は、反応性の観点から、アクリレートであることが好ましい。例えば、アルキルアクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールアクリレート、メトキシポリエチレングリコールアクリレート、ポリプロピレンアクリレート、メトキシポリプロピレングリコールアクリレート、ポリテトラメチレングリコールアクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールおよびポリプロピレングリコールアクリレート(ブロック型)、ポリエチレングリコールおよびポリプロピレングリコールアクリレート(ランダム型)、(アルコキシ化)トリメチロールプロパンアクリレート、アルコキシ化グリセリンアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールアクリレート、アルコキシ化ペンタエリスリトールアクリレート、(アルコキシ化)ジトリメリロールプロパンアクリレート、アルコキシ化ジペンタエリスリトールアクリレート、アルキルウレタンアクリレートなどが挙げられる。中でも、低透湿性、ブリードアウトの観点から、活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)としては、ヘテロ原子がより少ない樹脂が良く、官能基数が2官能以上の樹脂であることが好ましい。 In this embodiment, the active energy ray-curable resin (A) is preferably an acrylate from the viewpoint of reactivity. For example, alkyl acrylate, polyethylene glycol acrylate, methoxy polyethylene glycol acrylate, polypropylene acrylate, methoxy polypropylene glycol acrylate, polytetramethylene glycol acrylate, polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol acrylate (block type), polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol acrylate (random type), (Alkoxylated) trimethylolpropane acrylate, alkoxylated glycerin acrylate, pentaerythritol acrylate, alkoxylated pentaerythritol acrylate, (alkoxylated) ditrimellirol propane acrylate, alkoxylated dipentaerythritol acrylate, alkyl urethane An acrylate etc. are mentioned. Among these, from the viewpoint of low moisture permeability and bleed-out, the active energy ray-curable resin (A) is preferably a resin with fewer heteroatoms and a resin having two or more functional groups.
 本実施形態では、活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)として、前述の理由から、2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の最大の数が8以上であり、かつ、前記スペーサに環構造を含まない樹脂を用いている。以下、このような活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)の具体的化合物を示すが、本発明はこれらには限定されるものではない。なお、以下の化合物の構造式において、破線で囲まれた部分が、活性エネルギー基を示す。また、実線で囲まれた部分が、2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして機能し、かつ、上記スペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の数が最大となる部分を指す。 In the present embodiment, as the active energy ray-curable resin (A), for the reasons described above, the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer The resin does not contain a ring structure. Hereinafter, although the specific compound of such active energy ray curable resin (A) is shown, this invention is not limited to these. In the structural formulas of the following compounds, a portion surrounded by a broken line represents an active energy group. A portion surrounded by a solid line functions as a spacer connecting two active energy groups, and indicates a portion where the number of atoms arranged in a straight line as the spacer is maximized.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 〈環構造を有し、pKa1が1.0以上7.0以下である化合物(B)〉
 硬化層は、環構造を有し、かつ、第1酸解離定数pKa1が1.0以上7.0以下である少なくとも1種の化合物(B)を含有している。
<Compound (B) having a ring structure and pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less>
The hardened layer contains at least one compound (B) having a ring structure and having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less.
 酸解離定数は、酸の強さを定量的に表すための指標の一つであり、pKaの値が小さいほど強い酸であることを示す。第1酸解離定数pKa1は、多価の酸の第一解離(一段目の解離)での酸解離定数を表す。 The acid dissociation constant is one of the indexes for quantitatively expressing the strength of the acid. The smaller the pKa value, the stronger the acid. The first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 represents an acid dissociation constant in the first dissociation (first-stage dissociation) of a polyvalent acid.
 環構造を有し、かつ、第1酸解離定数pKa1が上記範囲の化合物(B)としては、例えばカルボン酸含有添加剤、バルビツール酸系化合物、ロジン系化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound (B) having a ring structure and having the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 in the above range include carboxylic acid-containing additives, barbituric acid compounds, and rosin compounds.
 《カルボン酸含有添加剤》
 カルボン酸含有添加剤としては、下記一般式で表される化合物が好ましい。
<< Carboxylic acid-containing additive >>
As the carboxylic acid-containing additive, a compound represented by the following general formula is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 Aは、水素、メチル基、エチル基、ヒドロキシル基、アミノ基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、カルボン酸基のいずれかである。ただし、上記添加剤は、1つ以上のカルボン酸基を含む。また、Lは、何もなしか、下記の構造物のいずれかを指す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
A is any one of hydrogen, methyl group, ethyl group, hydroxyl group, amino group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, and carboxylic acid group. However, the additive contains one or more carboxylic acid groups. L is nothing but any of the following structures.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 カルボン酸含有添加剤の具体例としては、例えば、安息香酸、サリチル酸2-カルボキシフェニル、4-ビフェニル酢酸、ビフェニル-4-カルボン酸、ビフェニル-4-カルボン酸、o-ベンゾイル安息香酸、2,2’-ビフェニルジカルボン酸、4,4’-ビフェニルジカルボン酸、フタル酸、1,3,5-ベンゼントリカルボン酸、ジフェニル酢酸、シクロヘキシルカルボン酸、1,3-アダマンタンジカルボン酸、トリフェニル酢酸、N-(2,6-ジエチルフェニルカルバモイルメチル)イミノジ酢酸、N-ベンジルイミノジ酢酸、テレフタル酸、イソフタル酸、オルトフタル酸、2,5-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、2,6-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,4-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,5-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、ジフェノキシエタンジカルボン酸、ジフェニルスルホンカルボン酸、アントラセンジカルボン、1,3-シクロペンタンジカルボン酸、1,3-シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸、1,4-シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸、ヘキサヒドロテレフタル酸、ヘキサヒドロイソフタル酸等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the carboxylic acid-containing additive include, for example, benzoic acid, 2-carboxyphenyl salicylate, 4-biphenylacetic acid, biphenyl-4-carboxylic acid, biphenyl-4-carboxylic acid, o-benzoylbenzoic acid, 2,2 '-Biphenyldicarboxylic acid, 4,4'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid, phthalic acid, 1,3,5-benzenetricarboxylic acid, diphenylacetic acid, cyclohexylcarboxylic acid, 1,3-adamantanedicarboxylic acid, triphenylacetic acid, N- ( 2,6-diethylphenylcarbamoylmethyl) iminodiacetic acid, N-benzyliminodiacetic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, orthophthalic acid, 2,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid Acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, diph Nonoxyethanedicarboxylic acid, diphenylsulfonecarboxylic acid, anthracenedicarboxylic acid, 1,3-cyclopentanedicarboxylic acid, 1,3-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid, hexahydroterephthalic acid, hexahydroisophthalic acid, etc. Can be mentioned.
 《バルビツール酸系化合物》
 バルビツール酸系化合物としては、下記一般式(G)で表される化合物が好ましい。
《Barbituric acid compound》
As the barbituric acid-based compound, a compound represented by the following general formula (G) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 一般式(G)において、R26はアルキル基、アルケニル基又はアリール基を表し、R27及びR28はそれぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基を表し、R29は水素原子を表す。R26、R27及びR28はそれぞれ独立に置換基を有していてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
In General Formula (G), R 26 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group, R 27 and R 28 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, R 29 represents a hydrogen atom. R 26 , R 27 and R 28 may each independently have a substituent.
 前記R26は炭素数1~20のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、炭素数2~20のアルケニル基又は炭素数6~20のアリール基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~12のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、炭素数2~20のアルケニル基又は炭素数6~20のアリール基であることがより好ましく、炭素数が1~12のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、炭素数2~10のアルケニル基又は炭素数6~18のアリール基であることが更に好ましく、炭素数が1~8のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、炭素数2~5のアルケニル基又は炭素数6~12のアリール基であることが特に好ましく、炭素数が1~6であるアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、又は炭素数6~12のアリール基であることが最も好ましい。 R 26 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. More preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group), It is more preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, An aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group) or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is most preferable. There.
 中でも、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、シクロヘキシル基、フェニル基又はナフチル基であることが更に好ましく、メチル基、シクロヘキシル基又はフェニル基であることが最も好ましい。 Among these, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferable, and a methyl group, a cyclohexyl group or a phenyl group is most preferable.
 前記R27及びR28はそれぞれ独立して炭素数1~20のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、炭素数2~20のアルケニル基または炭素数6~20のアリール基又は炭素数6~20のヘテロアリール基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~12のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、炭素数2~20のアルケニル基または炭素数6~20のアリール基がより好ましく、炭素数が1~12のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、炭素数2~10のアルケニル基又は炭素数6~18のアリール基であることが更に好ましく、炭素数が1~8のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、炭素数2~5のアルケニル基又は炭素数6~12のアリール基であることが特に好ましく、炭素数が1~6であるアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)、又は炭素数6~12のアリール基であることが最も好ましい。 R 27 and R 28 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or 6 to 20 carbon atoms. A heteroaryl group is more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. It is more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 (including a cycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms (cycloalkyl An alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group). Most preferably, or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
 中でも、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、シクロヘキシル基またはフェニル基、ナフチル基であることが最も好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、シクロヘキシル基又はフェニル基であることが特に好ましい。 Among them, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a phenyl group, or a naphthyl group is most preferable, and a methyl group, an ethyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a phenyl group is particularly preferable.
 前記R26が有していてもよい置換基としては、本発明の趣旨に反しない限りにおいて特に制限はないが、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基であることが好ましく、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素数6~12のアリール基であることがより好ましく、塩素原子、メチル基、又はフェニル基であることが特に好ましい。 The substituent which R 26 may have is not particularly limited as long as it is not contrary to the gist of the present invention, but is preferably a halogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and preferably a halogen atom, a carbon number It is more preferably a 1 to 6 alkyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a chlorine atom, a methyl group or a phenyl group.
 前記R27及びR28が有していてもよい置換基としては、本発明の趣旨に反しない限りにおいて特に制限はないが、炭素数6~12のアリール基であることが好ましく、フェニル基であることがより好ましい。 The substituent which R 27 and R 28 may have is not particularly limited as long as it does not contradict the gist of the present invention, but is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, More preferably.
 上記一般式(G)で表される化合物として、下記一般式(G-a)で表される化合物を用いることができる。一般式(G-a)で表される化合物は、製膜時の揮散抑制の観点で好ましい。 As the compound represented by the above general formula (G), a compound represented by the following general formula (Ga) can be used. The compound represented by the general formula (Ga) is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing volatilization during film formation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 上記一般式(G-a)中、L1~L3は、各々独立に、単結合又はアルキレン基を表し、Ar1~Ar3は、各々独立に、炭素数6~20のアリール基を表す。 In the general formula (Ga), L 1 to L 3 each independently represents a single bond or an alkylene group, and Ar 1 to Ar 3 each independently represents an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. .
 L1~L3は、各々独立に、単結合又は炭素数1以上の2価の連結基を表す。上記L1~L3は、単結合又は炭素数1~6のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、単結合、メチレン基又はエチレン基であることが更に好ましく、単結合又はメチレン基であることが特に好ましい。前記2価の連結基は置換基を有していてもよく、当該置換基は、後述するAr1、Ar2、及びAr3が有しうる置換基と同義である。 L 1 to L 3 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 or more carbon atoms. L 1 to L 3 are more preferably a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a single bond, a methylene group or an ethylene group, and a single bond or a methylene group. Particularly preferred. The divalent linking group may have a substituent, and the substituent is synonymous with the substituent that Ar 1 , Ar 2 , and Ar 3 described later may have.
 Ar1~Ar3は、好ましくはフェニル基、ナフチル基であり、更に好ましくはフェニル基である。Ar1~Ar3は置換基を有していてもよく、置換基を有していなくてもよい。置換基を有する場合、当該置換基は環構造を有さないことが好ましい。 Ar 1 to Ar 3 are preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group. Ar 1 to Ar 3 may have a substituent or may not have a substituent. When it has a substituent, it is preferable that the said substituent does not have a ring structure.
 Ar1、Ar2、及びAr3が有する置換基としては、特に制限はなく、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10で、例えばメチル、エチル、イソプロピル、t-ブチル、ペンチル、ヘプチル、1-エチルペンチル、ベンジル、2-エトキシエチル、1-カルボキシメチル等)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~20で、例えば、ビニル、アリル、オレイル等)、アルキニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~20で、例えば、エチニル、ブタジイニル、フェニルエチニル等)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数3~20で、例えば、シクロプロピル、シクロペンチル、シクロヘキシル、4-メチルシクロヘキシル等)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~26で、例えば、フェニル、1-ナフチル、4-メトキシフェニル、2-クロロフェニル、3-メチルフェニル等)、ヘテロ環基(好ましくは炭素数0~20のヘテロ環基で、環構成ヘテロ原子が酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子が好ましく、5または6員環でベンゼン環やヘテロ環で縮環していてもよく、該環が飽和環、不飽和環、芳香環であってもよく、例えば、2-ピリジル、4-ピリジル、2-イミダゾリル、2-ベンゾイミダゾリル、2-チアゾリル、2-オキサゾリル等)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20で、例えば、メトキシ、エトキシ、イソプロピルオキシ、ベンジルオキシ等)、アリールオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数6~26で、例えば、フェノキシ、1-ナフチルオキシ、3-メチルフェノキシ、4-メトキシフェノキシ等)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20で、例えば、メチルチオ、エチルチオ、イソプロピルチオ、ベンジルチオ等)、アリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数6~26で、例えば、フェニルチオ、1-ナフチルチオ、3-メチルフェニルチオ、4-メトキシフェニルチオ等)、アシル基(アルキルカルボニル基、アルケニルカルボニル基、アリールカルボニル基、ヘテロ環カルボニル基を含み、炭素数は20以下が好ましく、例えば、アセチル、ピバロイル、アクリロイル、メタクロロイル、ベンゾイル、ニコチノイル等)、アリーロイルアルキル基、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~20で、例えば、エトキシカルボニル、2-エチルヘキシルオキシカルボニル等)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数7~20で、例えば、フェニルオキシカルボニル、ナフチルオキシカルボニル等)、アミノ基(アミノ基、アルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基、ヘテロ環アミノ基を含み、好ましくは炭素数0~20で、例えば、アミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノ、N,N-ジエチルアミノ、N-エチルアミノ、アニリノ、1-ピロリジニル、ピペリジノ、モルホニル等)、スルホンアミド基(好ましくは炭素数0~20で、例えば、N,N-ジメチルスルホンアミド、N-フェニルスルホンアミド等)、スルファモイル基(好ましくは炭素数0~20で、例えば、N,N-ジメチルスルファモイル、N-フェニルスルファモイル等)、アシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20で、例えば、アセチルオキシ、ベンゾイルオキシ等)、カルバモイル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20で、例えば、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイル、N-フェニルカルバモイル等)、アシルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~20で、例えば、アセチルアミノ、アクリロイルアミノ、ベンゾイルアミノ、ニコチンアミド等)、シアノ基、ヒドロキシル基、メルカプト基またはハロゲン原子(例えばフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等)が挙げられる。 The substituent that Ar 1 , Ar 2 , and Ar 3 have is not particularly limited, and may be an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, pentyl, heptyl, 1- Ethylpentyl, benzyl, 2-ethoxyethyl, 1-carboxymethyl, etc.), alkenyl groups (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, oleyl, etc.), alkynyl groups (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms). For example, ethynyl, butadiynyl, phenylethynyl, etc.), cycloalkyl groups (preferably having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 4-methylcyclohexyl, etc.), aryl groups (preferably having 6 to 6 carbon atoms). 26, for example, phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 2-chlorophene , 3-methylphenyl, etc.), a heterocyclic group (preferably a heterocyclic group having from 0 to 20 carbon atoms, wherein the ring-constituting hetero atom is preferably an oxygen atom, nitrogen atom or sulfur atom, and a 5- or 6-membered ring is a benzene ring Or may be condensed with a heterocyclic ring, and the ring may be a saturated ring, an unsaturated ring, or an aromatic ring. For example, 2-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-imidazolyl, 2-benzoimidazolyl, 2- Thiazolyl, 2-oxazolyl, etc.), alkoxy groups (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as methoxy, ethoxy, isopropyloxy, benzyloxy, etc.), aryloxy groups (preferably having 6 to 26 carbon atoms, such as phenoxy) 1-naphthyloxy, 3-methylphenoxy, 4-methoxyphenoxy, etc.), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as methylthio , Ethylthio, isopropylthio, benzylthio, etc.), arylthio groups (preferably having 6 to 26 carbon atoms, such as phenylthio, 1-naphthylthio, 3-methylphenylthio, 4-methoxyphenylthio, etc.), acyl groups (alkylcarbonyl groups) , An alkenylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, and a heterocyclic carbonyl group, preferably having 20 or less carbon atoms, such as acetyl, pivaloyl, acryloyl, metachloroyl, benzoyl, nicotinoyl, etc.), an aryloylalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably Has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as ethoxycarbonyl, 2-ethylhexyloxycarbonyl, etc., an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, such as phenyloxycarbonyl, naphthyloxycarbo Etc.), amino groups (including amino groups, alkylamino groups, arylamino groups and heterocyclic amino groups, preferably having 0 to 20 carbon atoms, such as amino, N, N-dimethylamino, N, N-diethylamino N-ethylamino, anilino, 1-pyrrolidinyl, piperidino, morpholinyl, etc.), sulfonamide groups (preferably having 0 to 20 carbon atoms, such as N, N-dimethylsulfonamide, N-phenylsulfonamide, etc.), sulfamoyl Groups (preferably having 0 to 20 carbon atoms such as N, N-dimethylsulfamoyl, N-phenylsulfamoyl, etc.), acyloxy groups (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as acetyloxy, benzoyloxy, etc. ), A carbamoyl group (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N Phenylcarbamoyl, etc.), acylamino groups (preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as acetylamino, acryloylamino, benzoylamino, nicotinamide, etc.), cyano groups, hydroxyl groups, mercapto groups, or halogen atoms (eg, fluorine atoms, chlorines) Atom, bromine atom, iodine atom, etc.).
 Ar1、Ar2、及びAr3が有しうる上記置換基は、さらに上記置換基を有していてもよい。 The above substituents that Ar 1 , Ar 2 , and Ar 3 may have may further have the above substituents.
 ここで、Ar1、Ar2、及びAr3の各基が有してもよい上記の置換基のうち、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アシル基が好ましい。 Here, among the above substituents that each of Ar 1 , Ar 2 , and Ar 3 may have, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an acyl group are preferable.
 一般式(G)又は(G-a)で表される化合物の分子量は250~1200であることが好ましく、300~800であることがより好ましい。分子量が250以上であれば、フィルムからの揮散が抑制され、1200以下であれば、セルロースアシレートとの相溶性に優れるため、フィルムの透明性が良好となる。 The molecular weight of the compound represented by the general formula (G) or (Ga) is preferably 250 to 1200, and more preferably 300 to 800. If the molecular weight is 250 or more, volatilization from the film is suppressed, and if it is 1200 or less, the compatibility with the cellulose acylate is excellent, and thus the transparency of the film is good.
 以下に、一般式(G)又は(G-a)で表される化合物の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。下記例示化合物中、Meはメチル基を表す。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (G) or (Ga) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the following exemplary compounds, Me represents a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 上記一般式(G)で表される化合物は、尿素誘導体とマロン酸誘導体とを縮合させるバルビツール酸の合成法を用いて合成できることが知られている。N上に置換基を2つ有するバルビツール酸は、N,N’二置換型尿素とマロン酸クロリドを加熱するか、マロン酸と無水酢酸などの活性化剤とを組み合わせて加熱することにより得られ、例えば、Journal of the American Chemical Society、第61巻、1015頁(1939年)、Journal of Medicinal Chemistry、第54巻、2409頁(2011年)、Tetrahedron Letters、第40巻、8029頁(1999年)、WO2007/150011号公報などに記載の方法を好ましく用いることができる。 It is known that the compound represented by the above general formula (G) can be synthesized using a synthesis method of barbituric acid in which a urea derivative and a malonic acid derivative are condensed. Barbituric acid having two substituents on N can be obtained by heating N, N 'disubstituted urea and malonic acid chloride, or by combining malonic acid and an activating agent such as acetic anhydride. For example, Journal of the American Chemical Society, 61, 1015 (1939), Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 54, 2409 (2011), Tetrahedron 99, Vol. ), Methods described in WO2007 / 150011 and the like can be preferably used.
 また、縮合に用いるマロン酸は、無置換のものでも置換基を有するものでもよく、R5に相当する置換基を有するマロン酸を用いれば、バルビツール酸を構築することにより、一般式(G)で表される化合物を合成することができる。また、無置換のマロン酸と尿素誘導体を縮合させると5位が無置換のバルビツール酸が得られるので、これを修飾することにより、一般式(G)で表される化合物を合成してもよい。 The malonic acid used for the condensation may be either unsubstituted or substituted, and if malonic acid having a substituent corresponding to R 5 is used, by constructing barbituric acid, the general formula (G ) Can be synthesized. Further, when an unsubstituted malonic acid and a urea derivative are condensed, a 5-position unsubstituted barbituric acid is obtained. By modifying this, the compound represented by the general formula (G) can be synthesized. Good.
 なお、一般式(G)で表される化合物の合成法は、上記の方法に限定されるものではない。 In addition, the synthesis method of the compound represented by the general formula (G) is not limited to the above method.
 《ロジン系化合物》
 ロジン系化合物としては、例えば以下の構造式のものが挙げられる。
<Rosin compounds>
Examples of the rosin compound include the following structural formulas.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 上記化合物のうち、KE-604とKE-610は、それぞれ荒川化学工業(株)から市販されている。同じく、荒川化学工業(株)から、ロジンとして、KR-85、KR-612、KR-614、重合ロジンとしてKR-140が市販されている。また、アビエチン酸、デヒドロアビエチン酸及びパラストリン酸3者の混合物は、播磨化成(株)からG-7及びハートールR-Xとして市販されている。 Of the above compounds, KE-604 and KE-610 are commercially available from Arakawa Chemical Industries, Ltd. Similarly, KR-85, KR-612, and KR-614 are commercially available from Arakawa Chemical Industries, Ltd. as rosins, and KR-140 as a polymerized rosin. A mixture of abietic acid, dehydroabietic acid, and parastrinic acid is commercially available from Harima Kasei Co., Ltd. as G-7 and Hartle RX.
 上述した化合物(B)のうち、代表的な化合物(B)について、その構造式を以下に示す。 Among the compounds (B) described above, structural formulas of representative compounds (B) are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 (サブ樹脂)
 上述した硬化性樹脂(A)をメイン樹脂とすると、硬化層は、硬度を上げるために、本実施形態の効果を損なわない範囲で、メイン樹脂に加えてサブ樹脂を含んでいてもよい。サブ樹脂は、分子内に環構造を持ち、活性エネルギー基を有する化合物を含む。このようなサブ樹脂としては、例えば、環状脂肪族炭化水素基を有し、かつ分子内に3個以上のエチレン性不飽和二重結合基を有する化合物が挙げられる。
(Sub resin)
When the curable resin (A) described above is a main resin, the cured layer may contain a sub-resin in addition to the main resin within a range that does not impair the effects of the present embodiment in order to increase the hardness. The sub-resin includes a compound having a ring structure in the molecule and having an active energy group. Examples of such a sub-resin include a compound having a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and having 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated double bond groups in the molecule.
 環状脂肪族炭化水素基としては、具体的には、ノルボルニル、トリシクロデカニル、テトラシクロドデカニル、ペンタシクロペンタデカニル、アダマンチル、ジアマンタニル等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon group include norbornyl, tricyclodecanyl, tetracyclododecanyl, pentacyclopentadecanyl, adamantyl, diamantanyl and the like.
 エチレン性不飽和二重結合基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、スチリル基、アリル基等の重合性官能基が挙げられ、中でも、(メタ)アクリロイル基及び-C(O)OCH=CH2が好ましい。特に好ましくは、1分子内に3つ以上の(メタ)アクリロイル基を含有する化合物をサブ樹脂として用いることができる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated double bond group include polymerizable functional groups such as (meth) acryloyl group, vinyl group, styryl group and allyl group. Among them, (meth) acryloyl group and —C (O) OCH═ CH 2 is preferred. Particularly preferably, a compound containing three or more (meth) acryloyl groups in one molecule can be used as the sub-resin.
 環状脂肪族炭化水素基を有し、かつ分子内に3個以上のエチレン性不飽和二重結合基を有する化合物は、環状脂肪族炭化水素基とエチレン性不飽和二重結合基とが、連結基を介して結合することにより構成される。連結基としては、単結合、炭素数1~6の置換されていてもよいアルキレン基、N位が置換されていてもよいアミド基、N位が置換されていてもよいカルバモイル基、エステル基、オキシカルボニル基、エーテル基等、及びこれらを組み合わせて得られる基が挙げられる。 In a compound having a cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon group and having 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated double bond groups in the molecule, the cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon group and the ethylenically unsaturated double bond group are linked. It is constituted by bonding through a group. As the linking group, a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may be substituted, an amide group which may be substituted at the N-position, a carbamoyl group which may be substituted at the N-position, an ester group, Examples include oxycarbonyl groups, ether groups, and the like, and groups obtained by combining these.
 上記化合物としては、下記いずれかの一般式で表される化合物を用いることが好ましい。 As the compound, it is preferable to use a compound represented by any one of the following general formulas.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 一般式(I-1)中、Lは三価の連結基を表し、L’は二価の連結基を表し、R、R’、及びR’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。nは1~3の整数を表す。 In general formula (I-1), L represents a trivalent linking group, L ′ represents a divalent linking group, and R, R ′, and R ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having n represents an integer of 1 to 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 一般式(I-2)中、Lは二価の連結基を表し、L’は三価の連結基を表し、R、R’、及びR’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。nは1~3の整数を表す。 In general formula (I-2), L represents a divalent linking group, L ′ represents a trivalent linking group, and R, R ′, and R ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having n represents an integer of 1 to 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 一般式(I-3)中、L、及びL’は各々独立に三価の連結基を表し、R、R’、R’’、及びR’’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。nは1~3の整数を表す。 In general formula (I-3), L and L ′ each independently represent a trivalent linking group, and R, R ′, R ″, and R ′ ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double group. A group having a bond is represented. n represents an integer of 1 to 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 一般式(II-1)中、Lは三価の連結基を表し、L’は二価の連結基を表し、R、R’、及びR’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。nは1~2の整数を表す。 In general formula (II-1), L represents a trivalent linking group, L ′ represents a divalent linking group, and R, R ′, and R ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 一般式(II-2)中、Lは三価の連結基を表し、L’は二価連結基を表し、R、R’、及びR’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。 In general formula (II-2), L represents a trivalent linking group, L ′ represents a divalent linking group, and R, R ′, and R ″ each independently represents an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 一般式(II-3)中、L、及びL’は各々独立に三価の連結基を表し、R、R’、R’’、及びR’’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。nは1~2の整数を表す。 In general formula (II-3), L and L ′ each independently represent a trivalent linking group, and R, R ′, R ″, and R ′ ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double group. A group having a bond is represented. n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 一般式(III-1)中、Lは三価の連結基を表し、L’は二価の連結基を表し、R、R’、及びR’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。nは1~2の整数を表す。 In general formula (III-1), L represents a trivalent linking group, L ′ represents a divalent linking group, and R, R ′, and R ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 一般式(III-2)中、Lは二価の連結基を表し、L’は三価の連結基を表し、R、R’、及びR’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。nは1~2の整数を表す。 In general formula (III-2), L represents a divalent linking group, L ′ represents a trivalent linking group, and R, R ′, and R ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 一般式(III-3)中、L、及びL’は各々独立に三価の連結基を表し、R、R’、R’’、及びR’’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。nは1~2の整数を表す。 In general formula (III-3), L and L ′ each independently represent a trivalent linking group, and R, R ′, R ″, and R ′ ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double group. A group having a bond is represented. n represents an integer of 1 to 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 一般式(IV-1)中、L、L’、及びL’’は各々独立に二価の連結基を表し、R、R’、及びR’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。 In general formula (IV-1), L, L ′, and L ″ each independently represent a divalent linking group, and R, R ′, and R ″ each independently represent an ethylenically unsaturated double bond. Represents a group having
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 一般式(IV-2)中、L、L’、及びL’’’は各々独立に三価の連結基を表し、R、R’、R’’、R’’’、R’’’’、及びR’’’’’は各々独立にエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する基を表す。 In general formula (IV-2), L, L ′, and L ′ ″ each independently represent a trivalent linking group, and R, R ′, R ″, R ′ ″, R ″ ″. And R ″ ′ ″ each independently represents a group having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
 環状脂肪族炭化水素基を有し、かつ分子内に3個以上のエチレン性不飽和二重結合基を有する化合物の好ましい具体例化合物を、以下に記載する。 Preferred specific examples of the compound having a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and having three or more ethylenically unsaturated double bond groups in the molecule are described below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 (光重合開始剤)
 硬化層は、活性線硬化樹脂の硬化促進のため、光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。光重合開始剤の含有量は、質量比で、光重合開始剤:活性線硬化樹脂=20:100~0.01:100となる含有量であることが好ましい。光重合開始剤としては、具体的には、アルキルフェノン系、アセトフェノン、ベンゾフェノン、ヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、ミヒラーケトン、α-アミロキシムエステル、チオキサントン等、およびこれらの誘導体を挙げることができるが、特にこれらに限定されるものではない。光重合開始剤としては市販品を用いてもよく、例えば、BASFジャパン(株)製のイルガキュア184、イルガキュア907、イルガキュア651などが好ましい例示として挙げられる。
(Photopolymerization initiator)
The cured layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator to accelerate the curing of the actinic radiation curable resin. The content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably such that the photopolymerization initiator: active ray curable resin = 20: 100 to 0.01: 100 in terms of mass ratio. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator include alkylphenone series, acetophenone, benzophenone, hydroxybenzophenone, Michler's ketone, α-amyloxime ester, thioxanthone and the like, and derivatives thereof. It is not something. Commercially available products may be used as the photopolymerization initiator, and preferred examples include Irgacure 184, Irgacure 907, and Irgacure 651 manufactured by BASF Japan.
 (微粒子)
 硬化層は微粒子を含有しても良い。微粒子としては、特に制限されないが、シリカ、アルミナ、ジルコニア、酸化チタン、五酸化アンチモン等が挙げられ、好ましくはシリカである。シリカ微粒子は、内部に空洞を有する中空粒子でも良い。ポリマーシランカップリング剤で被覆されてなる微粒子が、良好な機械特性を発揮することから特に好ましい。含有量については、微粒子:活性線硬化樹脂=0.1:100~400:100となる含有量が好ましい。
(Fine particles)
The hardened layer may contain fine particles. Although it does not restrict | limit especially as microparticles | fine-particles, A silica, an alumina, a zirconia, a titanium oxide, antimony pentoxide etc. are mentioned, Preferably it is a silica. The silica fine particles may be hollow particles having cavities inside. Fine particles coated with a polymer silane coupling agent are particularly preferred because they exhibit good mechanical properties. The content is preferably a fine particle: active ray curable resin = 0.1: 100 to 400: 100.
 (ポリマーシランカップリング剤)
 ポリマーシランカップリング剤とは、重合性モノマーとシランカップリング剤(反応性シラン化合物)との反応物をいう。このようなポリマーシランカップリング剤は、例えば、特開平11-116240号公報に開示された重合性モノマーと反応性シラン化合物との反応物の製法に準じて得ることができる。
(Polymer silane coupling agent)
The polymer silane coupling agent refers to a reaction product of a polymerizable monomer and a silane coupling agent (reactive silane compound). Such a polymer silane coupling agent can be obtained, for example, according to the method for producing a reaction product of a polymerizable monomer and a reactive silane compound disclosed in JP-A-11-116240.
 重合性モノマーとして、具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)-n-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-n-ヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸-n-ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-n-オクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-エチルヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ノニル、(メタ)アクリル酸デシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ドデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸フェニル、(メタ)アクリル酸トルイル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-メトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-メトキシブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ステアリル、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-アミノエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸のエチレンオキサイド付加物、(メタ)アクリル酸トリフルオロメチルメチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-トリフルオロメチルエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-パーフルオロエチルエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-パーフルオロエチル-2-パーフルオロブチルエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-パーフルオロエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸パーフルオロメチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ジバーフルオロメチルメチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-パーフルオロメチル-2-パーフルオロエチルメチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-パーフルオロヘキシルエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-パーフルオロデシルエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-パーフルオロヘキサデシルエチル等の(メタ)アクリル酸系モノマー;スチレン、ビニルトルエン、α-メチルシチレン、クロルスチレン、スチレンスルホン酸及びその塩等のスチレン系モノマー;パーフルオロエチレン、パーフルオロプロピレン、フッ化ビニリデン等のフッ素含有ビニルモノマー;ビニルトリメトキシシラン、ビニルトリエトキシシラン等のケイ素含有ビニル系モノマー;無水マレイン酸、マレイン酸、マレイン酸のモノアルキルエステル及びジアルキルエステル;フマル酸、フマル酸のモノアルキルエステル及びジアルキルエステル;マレイミド、メチルマレイミド、エチルマレイミド、プロピルマレイミド、ブチルマレイミド、ヘキシルマレイミド、オクチルマレイミド、ドデシルマレイミド、ステアリルマレイミド、フェニルマレイミド、シクロヘキシルマレイミド等のニトリル基含有ビニル系モノマー;アクリルアミド、メタクリルアミド等のアミド基含有ビニル系モノマー;酢酸ビニル、プロピオン酸ビニル、ピバリン酸ビニル、安息香酸ビニル、桂皮酸ビニル等のビニルエステル類;エチレン、プロピレン等のアルケン類;ブタジエン、イソプレン等の共役ジエン類;塩化ビニル、塩化ビニリデン、塩化アリル、アリルアルコール、アクリル樹脂モノマー類;ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、メチルメタクリレート、エチルメタクリレート、ブチルメタクリレート、イソブチルメタクリレート、2-エチルヘキシルメテクリレート、イソデシルメテクリレート、n-ラウリルアクリレート、n-ステアリルアクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジメタクリレート、パーフルオロオクチルエチルメタクリレート、トリフロロエチルメテクリレート、ウレタンアクリレート等およびこれらの混合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the polymerizable monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid-n-propyl, (meth) acrylic acid isopropyl, (meth) -N-butyl, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid-n-hexyl, (meth) acrylic acid cyclohexyl, (meth) acrylic acid-n-heptyl, (meth) acrylic acid-n-octyl, ( 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, decyl (meth) acrylate, dodecyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, toluyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate , 2-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-methoxybutyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid -Hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, stearyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 2-aminoethyl (meth) acrylate, ethylene oxide adduct of (meth) acrylic acid, (Meth) acrylic acid trifluoromethyl methyl, (meth) acrylic acid 2-trifluoromethyl ethyl, (meth) acrylic acid 2-perfluoroethyl ethyl, (meth) acrylic acid 2-perfluoroethyl-2-perfluorobutyl Ethyl, 2-perfluoroethyl (meth) acrylate, perfluoromethyl (meth) acrylate, difluorofluoromethyl methyl (meth) acrylate, 2-perfluoromethyl-2-perfluoroethyl methyl (meth) acrylate, (Meth) acrylic acid 2-perfluorohexylethyl (Meth) acrylic acid-based monomers such as (meth) acrylic acid 2-perfluorodecylethyl and (meth) acrylic acid 2-perfluorohexadecylethyl; styrene, vinyltoluene, α-methylstyrene, chlorostyrene, styrenesulfonic acid and Styrene monomers such as salts thereof; fluorine-containing vinyl monomers such as perfluoroethylene, perfluoropropylene, and vinylidene fluoride; silicon-containing vinyl monomers such as vinyltrimethoxysilane and vinyltriethoxysilane; maleic anhydride, maleic acid, Monoalkyl and dialkyl esters of maleic acid; fumaric acid, monoalkyl and dialkyl esters of fumaric acid; maleimide, methylmaleimide, ethylmaleimide, propylmaleimide, butylmaleimide, hexyluma Nitrile group-containing vinyl monomers such as imide, octylmaleimide, dodecylmaleimide, stearylmaleimide, phenylmaleimide, cyclohexylmaleimide; amide group-containing vinyl monomers such as acrylamide and methacrylamide; vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, vinyl pivalate, benzoate Vinyl esters such as vinyl acid and vinyl cinnamate; Alkenes such as ethylene and propylene; Conjugated dienes such as butadiene and isoprene; Vinyl chloride, vinylidene chloride, allyl chloride, allyl alcohol, acrylic resin monomers; Pentaerythritol triacrylate , Pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, ditrimethylolpropane Tora (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, butyl methacrylate, isobutyl methacrylate, 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate, isodecyl methacrylate, n-lauryl acrylate, n-stearyl acrylate, 1,6 -Hexanediol dimethacrylate, perfluorooctylethyl methacrylate, trifluoroethyl methacrylate, urethane acrylate and the like and mixtures thereof.
 反応性シラン化合物としては、下記式(1)で表される有機ケイ素化合物を用いることが好ましい。
   X-R-Si(OR)3   (1)
(式中、Rは、置換または非置換の炭化水素基から選ばれる炭素数1~10の有機基を表す。Xは(メタ)アクロイル基、エポキシ基(グリシド基)、ウレタン基、アミノ基、フルオロ基から選ばれる1種または2種以上の官能基。)
As the reactive silane compound, an organosilicon compound represented by the following formula (1) is preferably used.
XR-Si (OR) 3 (1)
(In the formula, R represents an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms selected from a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group. X represents a (meth) acryloyl group, an epoxy group (glycid group), a urethane group, an amino group, One or more functional groups selected from fluoro groups.)
 式(1)で表される有機ケイ素化合物として、具体的には、3,3,3-トリフルオロプロピルトリメトキシシラン、メチル-3,3,3-トリフルオロプロピルジメトキシシラン、β-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリメトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシメチルトリメトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシメチルトリエキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシエチルトリメトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシエチルトリエトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-(β-グリシドキシエトキシ)プロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロオキシメチルトリメトキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロオキシメチルトリエキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロオキシエチルトリメトキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロオキシエチルトリエトキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロオキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロオキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロオキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロオキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-ウレイドイソプロピルプロピルトリエトキシシラン、パーフルオロオクチルエチルトリメトキシシラン、パーフルオロオクチルエチルトリエトキシシラン、パーフルオロオクチルエチルトリイソプロポキシシラン、トリフルオロプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-β(アミノエチル)γ-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、N-β(アミノエチル)γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-フェニル-γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン等およびこれらの混合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the organosilicon compound represented by the formula (1) include 3,3,3-trifluoropropyltrimethoxysilane, methyl-3,3,3-trifluoropropyldimethoxysilane, β- (3, 4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrimethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxymethyltrimethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxymethyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxyethyltrimethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxyethyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, γ- (β-glycidoxyethoxy) Propyltrimethoxysilane, γ- (meth) acrylooxymethyltrimethoxy Lan, γ- (meth) acrylooxymethyltrioxysilane, γ- (meth) acrylooxyethyltrimethoxysilane, γ- (meth) acryloxyethyltriethoxysilane, γ- (meth) acryloxypropyl Trimethoxysilane, γ- (meth) acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, γ- (meth) acryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, γ- (meth) acryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-ureidoisopropylpropyltriethoxy Silane, perfluorooctylethyltrimethoxysilane, perfluorooctylethyltriethoxysilane, perfluorooctylethyltriisopropoxysilane, trifluoropropyltrimethoxysilane, N-β (aminoethyl) γ-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysila , N-β (aminoethyl) γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N-phenyl-γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, and the like, and mixtures thereof.
 重合性モノマーと反応性シラン化合物とを反応させて、ポリマーシランカップリング剤が調製される。具体的には、重合性モノマー100重量部に対し、反応性シラン化合物を0.5~20重量部、さらには1~10重量部の範囲で混合した有機溶媒溶液を調製し、これに重合開始剤を添加し、加熱することによって得ることができる。 Polymeric silane coupling agent is prepared by reacting a polymerizable monomer with a reactive silane compound. Specifically, an organic solvent solution in which a reactive silane compound is mixed in an amount of 0.5 to 20 parts by weight, further 1 to 10 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymerizable monomer is prepared, and polymerization is started. It can be obtained by adding an agent and heating.
 (ポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆微粒子の調製方法)
 ポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆微粒子は、具体的には、微粒子の有機溶媒分散液にポリマーシランカップリング剤を加え、アルカリ存在下にポリマーシランカップリング剤で微粒子を被覆することによって調製できる。得られるポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆微粒子の平均粒子径の範囲は、5~500nm、さらには10~200nmであることが、光学フィルムに用いた際の光学特性を確保できる点で好ましい。
(Method for preparing polymer silane coupling agent coated fine particles)
Specifically, the polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles can be prepared by adding a polymer silane coupling agent to a fine particle organic solvent dispersion and coating the fine particles with the polymer silane coupling agent in the presence of an alkali. The average particle diameter of the resulting polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles is preferably 5 to 500 nm, more preferably 10 to 200 nm, from the viewpoint of securing optical properties when used in an optical film.
 硬化層中のポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆微粒子の含有量は、固形分として0.5~80質量部、さらには1~60質量部であることが、硬化層の膜強度を確保する観点から好ましい。 The content of the polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles in the cured layer is preferably 0.5 to 80 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 60 parts by mass as the solid content, from the viewpoint of securing the film strength of the cured layer. .
 (導電剤)
 硬化層には、帯電防止性を付与するために導電剤が含まれていても良い。好ましい導電剤としては、金属酸化物粒子又はπ共役系導電性ポリマーが挙げられる。また、イオン液体も導電性化合物として好ましく用いられる。
(Conductive agent)
The hardened layer may contain a conductive agent in order to impart antistatic properties. Preferred conductive agents include metal oxide particles or π-conjugated conductive polymers. An ionic liquid is also preferably used as the conductive compound.
 (添加剤)
 硬化層には、塗布性を良好にする観点から、フッ素-シロキサングラフト化合物、フッ素系化合物、シリコーン系化合物やHLB値が3~18の化合物が含まれていても良い。これら添加剤の種類や添加量を調整することで、親水性を制御しやすい。HLB値とは、Hydrophile-Lipophile-Balance、つまり、親水性-親油性のバランスのことであり、化合物の親水性又は親油性の大きさを示す値である。HLB値が小さいほど親油性が高く、値が大きいほど親水性が高くなる。また、HLB値は以下のような計算式によって求めることができる。
 HLB=7+11.7Log(Mw/Mo)
 式中、Mwは親水基の分子量、Moは親油基の分子量を表し、Mw+Mo=M(化合物の分子量)である。或いはグリフィン法によれば、HLB値=20×親水部の式量の総和/分子量(J.Soc.Cosmetic Chem.,5(1954),294)等が挙げられる。
(Additive)
The cured layer may contain a fluorine-siloxane graft compound, a fluorine compound, a silicone compound, or a compound having an HLB value of 3 to 18 from the viewpoint of improving the coating property. The hydrophilicity can be easily controlled by adjusting the types and amounts of these additives. The HLB value is Hydrophile-Lipophile-Balance, that is, a hydrophilic-lipophilic balance, and is a value indicating the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of a compound. The smaller the HLB value, the higher the lipophilicity, and the higher the value, the higher the hydrophilicity. The HLB value can be obtained by the following calculation formula.
HLB = 7 + 11.7Log (Mw / Mo)
In the formula, Mw represents the molecular weight of the hydrophilic group, Mo represents the molecular weight of the lipophilic group, and Mw + Mo = M (molecular weight of the compound). Alternatively, according to the Griffin method, HLB value = 20 × total formula weight of hydrophilic part / molecular weight (J. Soc. Cosmetic Chem., 5 (1954), 294) and the like.
 HLB値が3~18の化合物の具体的化合物を下記に挙げるが、これに限定されるものでない。( )内はHLB値を示す。花王株式会社製:エマルゲン102KG(6.3)、エマルゲン103(8.1)、エマルゲン104P(9.6)、エマルゲン105(9.7)、エマルゲン106(10.5)、エマルゲン108(12.1)、エマルゲン109P(13.6)、エマルゲン120(15.3)、エマルゲン123P(16.9)、エマルゲン147(16.3)、エマルゲン210P(10.7)、エマルゲン220(14.2)、エマルゲン306P(9.4)、エマルゲン320P(13.9)、エマルゲン404(8.8)、エマルゲン408(10.0)、エマルゲン409PV(12.0)、エマルゲン420(13.6)、エマルゲン430(16.2)、エマルゲン705(10.5)、エマルゲン707(12.1)、エマルゲン709(13.3)、エマルゲン1108(13.5)、エマルゲン1118S-70(16.4)、エマルゲン1135S-70(17.9)、エマルゲン2020G-HA(13.0)、エマルゲン2025G(15.7)、エマルゲンLS-106(12.5)、エマルゲンLS-110(13.4)、エマルゲンLS-114(14.0)、日信化学工業株式会社製:サーフィノール104E(4)、サーフィノール104H(4)、サーフィノール104A(4)、サーフィノール104BC(4)、サーフィノール104DPM(4)、サーフィノール104PA(4)、サーフィノール104PG-50(4)、サーフィノール104S(4)、サーフィノール420(4)、サーフィノール440(8)、サーフィノール465(13)、サーフィノール485(17)、サーフィノールSE(6)、信越化学工業株式会社製:X-22-4272(7)、X-22-6266(8)。 Specific compounds of compounds having an HLB value of 3 to 18 are listed below, but are not limited thereto. Figures in parentheses indicate HLB values. Made by Kao Corporation: Emulgen 102KG (6.3), Emulgen 103 (8.1), Emulgen 104P (9.6), Emulgen 105 (9.7), Emulgen 106 (10.5), Emulgen 108 (12. 1), Emulgen 109P (13.6), Emulgen 120 (15.3), Emulgen 123P (16.9), Emulgen 147 (16.3), Emulgen 210P (10.7), Emulgen 220 (14.2) , Emulgen 306P (9.4), Emulgen 320P (13.9), Emulgen 404 (8.8), Emulgen 408 (10.0), Emulgen 409PV (12.0), Emulgen 420 (13.6), Emulgen 430 (16.2), Emulgen 705 (10.5), Emulgen 707 (12.1), Emulgen 7 9 (13.3), Emulgen 1108 (13.5), Emulgen 1118S-70 (16.4), Emulgen 1135S-70 (17.9), Emulgen 2020G-HA (13.0), Emulgen 2025G (15. 7), Emulgen LS-106 (12.5), Emulgen LS-110 (13.4), Emulgen LS-114 (14.0), manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd .: Surfynol 104E (4), Surfynol 104H (4), Surfinol 104A (4), Surfinol 104BC (4), Surfinol 104DPM (4), Surfinol 104PA (4), Surfinol 104PG-50 (4), Surfinol 104S (4), Surfi Knoll 420 (4), Surfynol 440 (8), Surfynol 46 (13), Surfynol 485 (17), Surfynol SE (6), Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.: X-22-4272 (7), X-22-6266 (8).
 フッ素-シロキサングラフト化合物とは、少なくともフッ素系樹脂に、シロキサン及び/又はオルガノシロキサン単体を含むポリシロキサン及び/又はオルガノポリシロキサンをグラフト化させて得られる共重合体の化合物をいう。このようなフッ素-シロキサングラフト化合物は、後述の実施例に記載されているような方法で調製することができる。あるいは、市販品としては、富士化成工業株式会社製のZX-022H、ZX-007C、ZX-049、ZX-047-D等を挙げることができる。 The fluorine-siloxane graft compound refers to a copolymer compound obtained by grafting polysiloxane and / or organopolysiloxane containing siloxane and / or organosiloxane alone on at least a fluorine resin. Such a fluorine-siloxane graft compound can be prepared by a method as described in Examples described later. Alternatively, examples of commercially available products include ZX-022H, ZX-007C, ZX-049, and ZX-047-D manufactured by Fuji Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
 フッ素系化合物としては、DIC株式会社製のメガファックシリーズ(F-477、F-487、F-569等)、ダイキン工業株式会社社製のオプツールDSX、オプツールDACなどを挙げることができる。 Examples of the fluorine-based compound include Megafac series (F-477, F-487, F-569, etc.) manufactured by DIC Corporation, OPTOOL DSX, OPTOOL DAC, etc. manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd.
 シリコーン系化合物としては、信越化学工業株式会社製:KF-351、KF-352、KF-353、KF-354L、KF-355A、KF-615A、KF-945、KF-618、KF-6011、KF-6015、KF-6004、ビックケミージャパン株式会社製:BYK-UV3576、BYK-UV3535、BYK-UV3510、BYK-UV3505、BYK-UV3500、BYK-UV3510などを挙げることができる。これら成分は硬化層組成物中の固形分成分に対し、0.005質量部以上、10質量部以下の範囲で添加することが好ましい。これらの成分は全添加剤量が0.005質量部以上、10質量部以下の範囲であれば、2種類以上添加しても良い。 Examples of silicone compounds are Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: KF-351, KF-352, KF-353, KF-354L, KF-355A, KF-615A, KF-945, KF-618, KF-6011, KF. -6015, KF-6004, manufactured by Big Chemie Japan KK: BYK-UV3576, BYK-UV3535, BYK-UV3510, BYK-UV3505, BYK-UV3500, BYK-UV3510, and the like. These components are preferably added in a range of 0.005 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less with respect to the solid component in the cured layer composition. Two or more kinds of these components may be added as long as the total additive amount is in the range of 0.005 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less.
 (紫外線吸収剤)
 硬化層は、後述するセルロースエステルフィルムで説明する紫外線吸収剤を含有しても良い。紫外線吸収剤を含有する場合のフィルムの構成として、硬化層が2層以上で構成される場合には、フィルム基材と接する硬化層に紫外線吸収剤を含有することが好ましい。
(UV absorber)
The hardened layer may contain an ultraviolet absorber described in the cellulose ester film described later. As a structure of the film in the case of containing an ultraviolet absorber, when the cured layer is composed of two or more layers, the cured layer in contact with the film substrate preferably contains the ultraviolet absorber.
 紫外線吸収剤の含有量としては、質量比で、紫外線吸収剤:硬化性樹脂=0.01:100~20:100となる含有量であることが好ましい。 The content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably such that the mass ratio is ultraviolet absorber: curable resin = 0.01: 100 to 20: 100.
 (溶剤)
 硬化層は、上記した硬化層を形成する成分を、フィルム基材を膨潤又は一部溶解をする溶剤で希釈して硬化層組成物として、以下の方法でフィルム基材上に塗布し、乾燥、硬化して設けることが好ましい。
(solvent)
The cured layer is a component that forms the cured layer described above, diluted with a solvent that swells or partially dissolves the film substrate, and is applied as a cured layer composition on the film substrate in the following manner, dried. It is preferable to provide it by curing.
 溶剤としては、ケトン(メチルエチルケトン、アセトンなど)及び/又は酢酸エステル(酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチルなど)、アルコール(エタノール、メタノール、ノルマルプロパノール、イソプロパノール)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、シクロヘキサノン、メチルイソブチルケトンなどが好ましい。硬化層組成物の塗布量は、ウェット膜厚で0.1~80μmとなる量が適当であり、好ましくはウェット膜厚で0.5~30μmとなる量である。また、ドライ膜厚としては、平均膜厚0.01~20μmの範囲、好ましくは1~15μmの範囲である。より好ましくは、2~12μmの範囲である。 Solvents include ketones (methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, etc.) and / or acetate esters (methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, etc.), alcohols (ethanol, methanol, normal propanol, isopropanol), propylene glycol monomethyl ether, cyclohexanone, methyl isobutyl ketone. Etc. are preferable. The coating amount of the cured layer composition is suitably an amount that results in a wet film thickness of 0.1 to 80 μm, and preferably an amount that results in a wet film thickness of 0.5 to 30 μm. The dry film thickness is in the range of an average film thickness of 0.01 to 20 μm, preferably in the range of 1 to 15 μm. More preferably, it is in the range of 2 to 12 μm.
 硬化層組成物の塗布方法は、グラビアコーター、ディップコーター、リバースコーター、ワイヤーバーコーター、ダイコーター、インクジェット法等の公知の方法を用いることができる。 As a method for applying the cured layer composition, a known method such as a gravure coater, a dip coater, a reverse coater, a wire bar coater, a die coater, or an ink jet method can be used.
 (積層)
 硬化層は2層以上で構成されるほうが、表面硬度(耐擦傷性)の観点から好ましい。硬化層が2層以上で構成される場合、最表面層は上記したポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆微粒子を含有することが、表面硬度の点から好ましい。ポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆微粒子の含有量としては、質量比で、ポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆微粒子:硬化性樹脂=0.1:100~200:100の範囲が好ましい。
(Laminated)
The cured layer is preferably composed of two or more layers from the viewpoint of surface hardness (abrasion resistance). When the cured layer is composed of two or more layers, it is preferable from the viewpoint of surface hardness that the outermost surface layer contains the above-described polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles. The content of the polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles is preferably in the range of polymer silane coupling agent-coated fine particles: curable resin = 0.1: 100 to 200: 100 by mass ratio.
 硬化層を2層以上設ける場合、フィルム基材と接する硬化層の膜厚は0.01~50μmの範囲であることが好ましく、2層目の硬化層の膜厚は0.01~25μmの範囲であることが好ましい。 When two or more cured layers are provided, the thickness of the cured layer in contact with the film substrate is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 50 μm, and the thickness of the second cured layer is in the range of 0.01 to 25 μm. It is preferable that
 2層以上の積層は、同時重層で形成しても良い。同時重層とは、乾燥工程を経ずに基材上に2層以上の硬化層をwet on wetで塗布して、硬化層を形成することである。 Two or more layers may be formed by simultaneous multilayers. The simultaneous multi-layer is to form a hardened layer by applying two or more hardened layers on a base material without going through a drying step.
 第1の硬化層の上に乾燥工程を経ずに、第2の硬化層をwet on wetで積層するには、押し出しコーターにより逐次重層するか、若しくは複数のスリットを有するスロットダイにて同時重層を行えばよい。 In order to laminate the second hardened layer on the first hardened layer without going through a drying process, the layers are stacked one after another with an extrusion coater or simultaneously with a slot die having a plurality of slits. Can be done.
 (硬化層形成方法)
 硬化層組成物の塗布後、乾燥し、硬化(活性線を照射(UV硬化処理とも言う))し、更に必要に応じて、UV硬化後に加熱処理しても良い。UV硬化後の加熱処理温度は80℃以上が好ましく、更に好ましくは100℃以上であり、特に好ましくは120℃以上である。このような高温でUV硬化後の加熱処理を行うことで、膜強度に優れた硬化層を得ることができる。
(Curing layer formation method)
After applying the cured layer composition, it may be dried and cured (irradiated with actinic radiation (also referred to as UV curing treatment)), and if necessary, may be heat treated after UV curing. The heat treatment temperature after UV curing is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 100 ° C. or higher, and particularly preferably 120 ° C. or higher. By performing the heat treatment after UV curing at such a high temperature, a cured layer having excellent film strength can be obtained.
 乾燥は、減率乾燥区間の温度を30℃以上で行うことが好ましい。更に好ましくは、減率乾燥区間の温度は50℃以上である。 Drying is preferably performed at a temperature of 30% or more in the rate of drying section. More preferably, the temperature of the decreasing rate drying section is 50 ° C. or higher.
 一般に、乾燥プロセスは、乾燥が始まると、乾燥速度が一定の状態から徐々に減少する状態へと変化していくことが知られている。乾燥速度が一定の区間を恒率乾燥区間、乾燥速度が減少していく区間を減率乾燥区間と呼ぶ。 In general, it is known that the drying process changes from a constant state to a gradually decreasing state when drying starts. A section in which the drying speed is constant is called a constant rate drying section, and a section in which the drying speed decreases is called a decreasing rate drying section.
 UV硬化処理の光源としては、紫外線を発生する光源であれば制限なく使用できる。例えば、低圧水銀灯、中圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、超高圧水銀灯、カーボンアーク灯、メタルハライドランプ、キセノンランプ等を用いることができる。 As a light source for UV curing treatment, any light source that generates ultraviolet rays can be used without limitation. For example, a low pressure mercury lamp, a medium pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon lamp, or the like can be used.
 照射条件はそれぞれのランプによって異なるが、活性線の照射量は、通常50~1000mJ/cm2の範囲、好ましくは50~300mJ/cm2の範囲である。また、UV硬化処理では、酸素による反応阻害を防止するため、酸素除去(例えば、窒素パージなどの不活性ガスによる置換)を行うこともできる。酸素濃度の除去量を調整することで、表面の硬化状態を制御できる。 Irradiation conditions vary depending on each lamp, but the irradiation amount of active rays is usually in the range of 50 to 1000 mJ / cm 2 , preferably in the range of 50 to 300 mJ / cm 2 . In the UV curing treatment, oxygen removal (for example, replacement with an inert gas such as nitrogen purge) can be performed to prevent reaction inhibition by oxygen. The cured state of the surface can be controlled by adjusting the removal amount of the oxygen concentration.
 活性線を照射する際には、フィルムの搬送方向に張力を付与しながら行うことが好ましく、更に好ましくは幅方向にも張力を付与しながら行うことである。付与する張力は30~300N/mが好ましい。張力を付与する方法は特に限定されず、バックローラ上で搬送方向に張力を付与してもよく、テンターにて幅方向、又は2軸方向に張力を付与してもよい。これによって更に平面性の優れたフィルムを得ることができる。 When irradiating actinic rays, it is preferably performed while applying tension in the transport direction of the film, more preferably while applying tension in the width direction. The tension to be applied is preferably 30 to 300 N / m. The method for applying tension is not particularly limited, and tension may be applied in the conveying direction on the back roller, or tension may be applied in the width direction or biaxial direction by a tenter. Thereby, a film having further excellent flatness can be obtained.
 光学フィルム上に、硬化層は少なくとも一層有れば良く、複数層からなっていても良い。また、光学フィルムの両面に硬化層があってもよい。 There may be at least one cured layer on the optical film, and it may be composed of a plurality of layers. Moreover, there may be a cured layer on both sides of the optical film.
 (バックコート層)
 光学フィルムの硬化層を設けた側と反対側の面に、バックコート層を設けても良い。バックコート層は、塗布やCVDなどによって、硬化層やその他の層を設けることで生じるカールを矯正する為に設けられる。即ち、バックコート層を設けた面を内側にして丸まろうとする性質を持たせることにより、カールの度合いをバランスさせることができる。なお、バックコート層は、好ましくはブロッキング防止層を兼ねて塗設されることも好ましく、その場合、バックコート層塗布組成物には、ブロッキング防止機能を持たせる為に微粒子が添加されることが好ましい。
(Back coat layer)
You may provide a backcoat layer in the surface on the opposite side to the side which provided the hardened layer of the optical film. The back coat layer is provided to correct curling caused by providing a hardened layer or other layers by coating or CVD. That is, the degree of curling can be balanced by imparting the property of being rounded with the surface on which the backcoat layer is provided facing inward. In addition, it is also preferable that the back coat layer is preferably applied also as an anti-blocking layer. In that case, fine particles may be added to the back coat layer coating composition to provide an anti-blocking function. preferable.
 バックコート層に添加される微粒子としては、無機化合物の例として、二酸化珪素、二酸化チタン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ジルコニウム、炭酸カルシウム、炭酸カルシウム、タルク、クレイ、焼成カオリン、焼成珪酸カルシウム、酸化錫、酸化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、ITO、水和珪酸カルシウム、珪酸アルミニウム、珪酸マグネシウム及びリン酸カルシウムを挙げることができる。微粒子は珪素を含むものが、ヘイズが低くなる点で好ましく、特に二酸化珪素が好ましい。これらの微粒子は、例えば、アエロジルR972、R972V、R974、R812、200、200V、300、R202、OX50、TT600(以上日本アエロジル(株)製)の商品名で市販されており、使用することができる。酸化ジルコニウムの微粒子は、例えば、アエロジルR976及びR811(以上日本アエロジル(株)製)の商品名で市販されており、使用することができる。ポリマー微粒子の例として、シリコーン樹脂、フッ素樹脂及びアクリル樹脂を挙げることができる。シリコーン樹脂が好ましく、特に三次元の網状構造を有するものが好ましく、例えば、トスパール103、同105、同108、同120、同145、同3120及び同240(以上東芝シリコーン(株)製)の商品名で市販されており、使用することができる。 As fine particles added to the backcoat layer, examples of inorganic compounds include silicon dioxide, titanium dioxide, aluminum oxide, zirconium oxide, calcium carbonate, calcium carbonate, talc, clay, calcined kaolin, calcined calcium silicate, tin oxide, and oxide. Mention may be made of indium, zinc oxide, ITO, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate and calcium phosphate. Fine particles containing silicon are preferable in terms of low haze, and silicon dioxide is particularly preferable. These fine particles are commercially available under the trade names of, for example, Aerosil R972, R972V, R974, R812, 200, 200V, 300, R202, OX50, and TT600 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.). . Zirconium oxide fine particles are commercially available, for example, under the trade names Aerosil R976 and R811 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.) and can be used. Examples of the polymer fine particles include a silicone resin, a fluororesin, and an acrylic resin. Silicone resins are preferable, and those having a three-dimensional network structure are particularly preferable. For example, Tospearl 103, 105, 108, 120, 145, 3120, and 240 (manufactured by Toshiba Silicone Co., Ltd.) It is marketed by name and can be used.
 これらの中でも、アエロジル200V、アエロジルR972Vが、ヘイズを低く保ちながら、ブロッキング防止効果が大きい為、特に好ましく用いられる。本実施形態で用いられる光学フィルムの裏面側の動摩擦係数が0.9以下、特に0.1~0.9であることが好ましい。 Among these, Aerosil 200V and Aerosil R972V are particularly preferably used because they have a large anti-blocking effect while keeping haze low. The dynamic friction coefficient on the back side of the optical film used in this embodiment is preferably 0.9 or less, particularly preferably 0.1 to 0.9.
 バックコート層に含まれる微粒子は、バインダーに対して0.1~50質量%含まれていることが好ましく、0.1~10質量%含まれていることがより好ましい。バックコート層を設けた場合のヘイズの増加は、1%以下であることが好ましく、0.5%以下であることがより好ましく、特に0.0~0.1%であることが好ましい。 The fine particles contained in the backcoat layer are preferably contained in an amount of 0.1 to 50% by weight, more preferably 0.1 to 10% by weight, based on the binder. The increase in haze when the backcoat layer is provided is preferably 1% or less, more preferably 0.5% or less, and particularly preferably 0.0 to 0.1%.
 バックコート層は、具体的には、透明樹脂フィルム(フィルム基材)を溶解させる溶媒または膨潤させる溶媒を含む組成物を塗布することによって形成されることが好ましい。用いる溶媒としては、溶解させる溶媒及び/または膨潤させる溶媒の混合物の他更に溶解させない溶媒を含む場合もあり、これらを透明樹脂フィルムのカール度合や樹脂の種類によって適宜の割合で混合した組成物及び塗布量で形成すればよい。 Specifically, the backcoat layer is preferably formed by applying a composition containing a solvent that dissolves or swells the transparent resin film (film substrate). The solvent to be used may include a solvent to be dissolved and / or a solvent to be swollen in addition to a solvent to be swelled, a composition in which these are mixed at an appropriate ratio depending on the degree of curl of the transparent resin film and the type of resin What is necessary is just to form by the application quantity.
 カール防止機能を強めたい場合は、用いる溶媒組成を溶解させる溶媒及び/または膨潤させる溶媒の混合比率を大きくし、溶解させない溶媒の比率を小さくするのが効果的である。この混合比率は、好ましくは(溶解させる溶媒及び/または膨潤させる溶媒):(溶解させない溶媒)=10:0~0.3:9.7である。このような混合組成物に含まれる、透明樹脂フィルムを溶解または膨潤させる溶媒としては、例えば、ジオキサン、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、シクロヘキサン、ジアセトンアルコール、1,3-ジオキソラン、N-メチルピロリドン、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、炭酸プロピレン、シクロペンタノン、3-ペンタノン、1,2-ジメトキシエタン、テトラヒドロフラン、乳酸エチル、ビス(2-メトキシエチル)エーテル、酢酸2-メトキシエチル、プロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル、トリクロロエチレン、メチレンクロライド、エチレンクロライド、テトラクロロエタン、トリクロロエタン、クロロホルムなどがある。溶解させない溶媒としては、例えば、メタノール、エタノール、n-プロピルアルコール、i-プロピルアルコール、n-ブタノール、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、或いは炭化水素類(トルエン、キシレン、シクロヘキサノール)などがある。 In order to enhance the curl prevention function, it is effective to increase the mixing ratio of the solvent for dissolving the solvent composition to be used and / or the solvent for swelling, and to decrease the ratio of the solvent not to be dissolved. This mixing ratio is preferably (solvent to be dissolved and / or solvent to be swollen) :( solvent to be dissolved) = 10: 0 to 0.3: 9.7. Examples of the solvent for dissolving or swelling the transparent resin film contained in such a mixed composition include dioxane, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, N, N-dimethylformamide, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, cyclohexane, diacetone alcohol, 1 , 3-dioxolane, N-methylpyrrolidone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene carbonate, cyclopentanone, 3-pentanone, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, tetrahydrofuran, ethyl lactate, bis (2-methoxyethyl) ether, acetic acid 2 -Methoxyethyl, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, trichloroethylene, methylene chloride, ethylene chloride, tetrachloroethane, trichloroethane, chloroform and the like. Examples of the solvent that does not dissolve include methanol, ethanol, n-propyl alcohol, i-propyl alcohol, n-butanol, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, and hydrocarbons (toluene, xylene, cyclohexanol).
 これらの塗布組成物をグラビアコーター、ディップコーター、リバースコーター、ワイヤーバーコーター、ダイコーター等を用いて透明樹脂フィルムの表面にウェット膜厚1~100μmで塗布するのが好ましいが、特に5~30μmであることが好ましい。バックコート層はバインダーとして樹脂を含有しても良い。バックコート層のバインダーとして用いられる樹脂としては、例えば塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル共重合体、塩化ビニル樹脂、酢酸ビニル樹脂、酢酸ビニルとビニルアルコールの共重合体、部分加水分解した塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル共重合体、塩化ビニル-塩化ビニリデン共重合体、塩化ビニル-アクリロニトリル共重合体、エチレン-ビニルアルコール共重合体、塩素化ポリ塩化ビニル、エチレン-塩化ビニル共重合体、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体等のビニル系重合体或いは共重合体、ニトロセルロース、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート(好ましくはアセチル基置換度1.8~2.3、プロピオニル基置換度0.1~1.0)、ジアセチルセルロース、セルロースアセテートブチレート樹脂等のセルロース誘導体、マレイン酸及び/またはアクリル酸の共重合体、アクリル酸エステル共重合体、アクリロニトリル-スチレン共重合体、塩素化ポリエチレン、アクリロニトリル-塩素化ポリエチレン-スチレン共重合体、メチルメタクリレート-ブタジエン-スチレン共重合体、アクリル樹脂、ポリビニルアセタール樹脂、ポリビニルブチラール樹脂、ポリエステルポリウレタン樹脂、ポリエーテルポリウレタン樹脂、ポリカーボネートポリウレタン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、アミノ樹脂、スチレン-ブタジエン樹脂、ブタジエン-アクリロニトリル樹脂等のゴム系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、フッ素系樹脂等を挙げることができるが、これらに限定されるものではない。例えば、アクリル樹脂としては、アクリペットMD、VH、MF、V(三菱レイヨン(株)製)、ハイパールM-4003、M-4005、M-4006、M-4202、M-5000、M-5001、M-4501(根上工業株式会社製)、ダイヤナールBR-50、BR-52、BR-53、BR-60、BR-64、BR-73、BR-75、BR-77、BR-79、BR-80、BR-82、BR-83、BR-85、BR-87、BR-88、BR-90、BR-93、BR-95、BR-100、BR-101、BR-102、BR-105、BR-106、BR-107、BR-108、BR-112、BR-113、BR-115、BR-116、BR-117、BR-118等(三菱レイヨン(株)製)のアクリル及びメタクリル系モノマーを原料として製造した各種ホモポリマー並びにコポリマーなどが市販されており、この中から好ましいものを適宜選択することもできる。好ましくは、ジアセチルセルロース、セルロースアセテートプロピオネートのようなセルロース系樹脂層である。 These coating compositions are preferably applied on the surface of the transparent resin film with a gravure coater, dip coater, reverse coater, wire bar coater, die coater, etc., with a wet film thickness of 1 to 100 μm, particularly 5 to 30 μm. Preferably there is. The back coat layer may contain a resin as a binder. Examples of the resin used as the binder for the backcoat layer include vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, vinyl chloride resin, vinyl acetate resin, vinyl acetate-vinyl alcohol copolymer, partially hydrolyzed vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer. Polymer, vinyl chloride-vinylidene chloride copolymer, vinyl chloride-acrylonitrile copolymer, ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride, ethylene-vinyl chloride copolymer, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, etc. Vinyl polymer or copolymer, nitrocellulose, cellulose acetate propionate (preferably acetyl group substitution degree 1.8-2.3, propionyl group substitution degree 0.1-1.0), diacetylcellulose, cellulose Cellulose derivatives such as acetate butyrate resin, maleic acid and / or Or acrylic acid copolymer, acrylic ester copolymer, acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer, chlorinated polyethylene, acrylonitrile-chlorinated polyethylene-styrene copolymer, methyl methacrylate-butadiene-styrene copolymer, acrylic resin Rubber resins such as polyvinyl acetal resin, polyvinyl butyral resin, polyester polyurethane resin, polyether polyurethane resin, polycarbonate polyurethane resin, polyester resin, polyether resin, polyamide resin, amino resin, styrene-butadiene resin, butadiene-acrylonitrile resin, Examples thereof include, but are not limited to, silicone resins and fluorine resins. For example, as acrylic resins, Acrypet MD, VH, MF, V (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Hyperl M-4003, M-4005, M-4006, M-4202, M-5000, M-5001, M-4501 (manufactured by Negami Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Dialnal BR-50, BR-52, BR-53, BR-60, BR-64, BR-73, BR-75, BR-77, BR-79, BR -80, BR-82, BR-83, BR-85, BR-87, BR-88, BR-90, BR-93, BR-95, BR-100, BR-101, BR-102, BR-105 BR-106, BR-107, BR-108, BR-112, BR-113, BR-115, BR-116, BR-117, BR-118, etc. (Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.) acrylic and The methacrylic monomers such as various homopolymers and copolymers were prepared as raw materials are commercially available and can also be selected as appropriate preferred from among these. A cellulose resin layer such as diacetyl cellulose or cellulose acetate propionate is preferable.
 バックコート層を塗設する順番は、光学フィルムのバックコート層とは反対側の硬化層を塗設する前でも後でも構わないが、バックコート層がブロッキング防止層を兼ねる場合は先に塗設することが望ましい。或いは硬化層の塗設の前後に2回以上に分けてバックコート層を塗布することもできる。 The order of coating the backcoat layer may be before or after coating the cured layer on the side opposite to the backcoat layer of the optical film, but if the backcoat layer also serves as an anti-blocking layer, coat it first. It is desirable to do. Alternatively, the back coat layer can be applied twice or more before and after the coating of the hardened layer.
 〔光学フィルム特性〕
 (表面形状)
 硬化層の算術平均粗さRa(JIS B0601:2001)は、2~100nmの範囲内が好ましく、特に好ましくは2~20nmの範囲内である。前記範囲の算術平均粗さRaとすることで、視認性やクリア性に優れる。算術平均粗さRaは、JIS B0601:2001に準じて光学干渉式表面粗さ計(ZYGO社製、NewView)で測定した値である。
[Optical film characteristics]
(Surface shape)
The arithmetic average roughness Ra (JIS B0601: 2001) of the hardened layer is preferably in the range of 2 to 100 nm, particularly preferably in the range of 2 to 20 nm. By setting the arithmetic average roughness Ra within the above range, the visibility and the clearness are excellent. The arithmetic average roughness Ra is a value measured with an optical interference surface roughness meter (manufactured by ZYGO, NewView) according to JIS B0601: 2001.
 (ヘイズ)
 光学フィルムのヘイズは、画像表示装置に用いた場合の視認性から0.05%~10%の範囲内であることが好ましい。ヘイズは、JIS K7105及びJIS K7136に準じて測定できる。
(Haze)
The haze of the optical film is preferably in the range of 0.05% to 10% in view of visibility when used in an image display device. Haze can be measured according to JIS K7105 and JIS K7136.
 (硬度)
 光学フィルムの硬度については、硬度の指標である鉛筆硬度がHB以上であることが好ましい。鉛筆硬度がHB以上であれば、偏光板化工程で、傷が付きにくい。鉛筆硬度は、作製した光学フィルムを温度23℃、相対湿度55%の条件で2時間以上調湿した後、加重500g条件でJIS S 6006が規定する試験用鉛筆を用いて、硬化層をJIS K5400が規定する鉛筆硬度評価方法に従い測定した値である。
(hardness)
About the hardness of an optical film, it is preferable that the pencil hardness which is a parameter | index of hardness is HB or more. If the pencil hardness is equal to or higher than HB, it is difficult to be damaged in the polarizing plate forming step. For pencil hardness, the cured optical layer was conditioned at a temperature of 23 ° C. and a relative humidity of 55% for 2 hours or more, and then the cured layer was JIS K5400 using a test pencil specified by JIS S 6006 under a load of 500 g. Is a value measured in accordance with the pencil hardness evaluation method defined by.
 〔フィルム基材〕
 フィルム基材は、セルロース系フィルムで構成される。セルロース系フィルムとしては、製造が容易であること、硬化層と接着し易いこと、光学的に等方性であることが好ましく、例えばセルロースエーテルフィルムやセルロースエステルフィルムが挙げられる。
[Film base]
The film substrate is composed of a cellulose-based film. As a cellulose film, it is preferable that manufacture is easy, it is easy to adhere | attach with a hardened layer, and it is optically isotropic, for example, a cellulose ether film and a cellulose-ester film are mentioned, for example.
 (セルロースエーテルフィルム)
 セルロースエーテルフィルムは、セルロースエーテル樹脂組成物(以下、単にセルロースエーテルともいう)を主成分とするフィルムである。セルロースエーテルは、セルロースの水酸基が炭素数4以下のアルコキシ基で置換されたものであることが好ましい。具体的には、セルロースの水酸基がメトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基のいずれかまたは複数のアルコキシ基によって置換されたものが好ましい。特に、セルロースの水酸基が、メトキシ基とエトキシ基の単独あるいは複数のアルコキシ基によって置換されたものが好ましく、中でもエトキシ置換度(DSet)が1.8以上2.8以下、より好ましくはDSetが1.8以上2.5以下を満たすエチルセルロースを好適に用いることができる。
(Cellulose ether film)
The cellulose ether film is a film containing a cellulose ether resin composition (hereinafter also simply referred to as cellulose ether) as a main component. The cellulose ether is preferably one in which the hydroxyl group of cellulose is substituted with an alkoxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms. Specifically, it is preferable that the hydroxyl group of cellulose is substituted by any one of a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group or a plurality of alkoxy groups. In particular, those in which the hydroxyl group of cellulose is substituted by a single or a plurality of alkoxy groups of methoxy group and ethoxy group are preferable. Among them, the degree of ethoxy substitution (DSet) is 1.8 or more and 2.8 or less, more preferably DSet is 1 Ethyl cellulose satisfying .8 or more and 2.5 or less can be preferably used.
 なお、本明細書において、DSetは、セルロース分子中の2,3,6位に存在する3個の水酸基が平均してどれだけエトキシ化されているかを表し、置換度が3のときはすべての水酸基がエトキシ化されていることを示す。それぞれの位置の置換度は均等でもよく、いずれかの位置に偏っていてもよい。エーテル置換度はASTM D4794-94に記載の方法にて定量することができる。 In the present specification, DSet represents the average ethoxylation of the three hydroxyl groups present at the 2, 3, and 6 positions in the cellulose molecule. It shows that the hydroxyl group is ethoxylated. The degree of substitution at each position may be equal or may be biased to any position. The degree of ether substitution can be quantified by the method described in ASTM D4794-94.
 置換度が1.8を下回ると、単独で溶解する溶剤の種類が限定される上に、フィルムの吸水率が大きくなり、寸法安定性が低下する傾向がある。また、置換度が2.8を超えても、溶解する溶剤の種類が限定されるばかりでなく、樹脂自体が高価になる傾向にある。 If the degree of substitution is less than 1.8, the type of solvent that can be dissolved alone is limited, and the water absorption rate of the film increases and the dimensional stability tends to decrease. Even if the degree of substitution exceeds 2.8, not only the type of solvent to be dissolved is limited, but the resin itself tends to be expensive.
 セルロースエーテルは、それ自体既知の方法で製造することがでる。例えば、セルロースを強苛性ソーダ溶液で処理してアルカリセルロースとし、これをメチルクロリドやエチルクロリドと反応させ、エーテル化することにより、製造することができる。 Cellulose ether can be produced by a method known per se. For example, it can be produced by treating cellulose with a strong caustic soda solution to make alkali cellulose, reacting it with methyl chloride or ethyl chloride, and etherifying it.
 セルロースエーテルの重量平均分子量は、好ましくは10万から40万であり、より好ましくは13万から30万であり、さらに好ましくは15万から25万である。分子量が40万よりも大きい場合、溶剤に対する溶解度が低下するだけでなく、得られる溶液の粘度が高くなりすぎて、溶剤キャスト法に適さず、熱成形を困難にし、フィルムの透明性が低下する等の問題を生じる傾向がある。一方、分子量が10万よりも小さい場合、得られるフィルムの機械的強度が低下する傾向がある。 The weight average molecular weight of the cellulose ether is preferably 100,000 to 400,000, more preferably 130,000 to 300,000, and further preferably 150,000 to 250,000. When the molecular weight is larger than 400,000, not only the solubility in the solvent is lowered, but also the viscosity of the resulting solution becomes too high, not suitable for the solvent casting method, making thermoforming difficult, and the transparency of the film is lowered. Tend to cause such problems. On the other hand, when the molecular weight is smaller than 100,000, the mechanical strength of the resulting film tends to decrease.
 セルロースエーテルとしては、単一の原料から製造されるセルロースエーテルを用いてもよいし、原料の異なるセルロースエーテルを2種以上組み合わせて用いてもよい。 As the cellulose ether, cellulose ether produced from a single raw material may be used, or two or more kinds of cellulose ethers having different raw materials may be used in combination.
 (セルロースエステルフィルム)
 セルロースエステルフィルムは、セルロースエステル樹脂組成物を主成分とするフィルムである。本明細書において、セルロースエステルとは、セルロースを構成するβ-1,4結合しているグルコース単位中の2位、3位および6位の水酸基(-OH)の水素原子の一部、または全部がアシル基で置換されたセルロースアシレート樹脂をいう。
(Cellulose ester film)
The cellulose ester film is a film containing a cellulose ester resin composition as a main component. In the present specification, the cellulose ester is a part or all of hydrogen atoms of hydroxyl groups (—OH) at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions in the β-1,4 bonded glucose units constituting cellulose. Refers to a cellulose acylate resin substituted with an acyl group.
 セルロースエステルフィルムの市販品としては、例えばコニカミノルタタックKC8UX、KC4UX、KC8UY、KC4UY、KC6UA、KC4UA、KC2UA、KC4UE及びKC4UZ(以上、コニカミノルタ(株)製)が挙げられる。セルロースエステルフィルムの屈折率は1.45~1.55であることが好ましい。屈折率は、JIS K7142-2008に準じて測定することができる。 Examples of commercially available cellulose ester films include Konica Minoltack KC8UX, KC4UX, KC8UY, KC4UAY, KC6UA, KC4UA, KC2UA, KC4UE and KC4UZ (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.). The refractive index of the cellulose ester film is preferably 1.45 to 1.55. The refractive index can be measured according to JIS K7142-2008.
 セルロースエステルは、セルロースの低級脂肪酸エステルであることが好ましい。低級脂肪酸とは、炭素原子数が6以下の脂肪酸を意味する。セルロースの低級脂肪酸エステルとしては、例えば、セルロースアセテート、セルロースジアセテート、セルローストリアセテート、セルロースプロピオネート、セルロースブチレート等や、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート、セルロースアセテートブチレート等の混合脂肪酸エステルを用いることができる。特に好ましく用いられるセルロースの低級脂肪酸エステルは、セルロースジアセテート、セルローストリアセテート、セルロースアセテートプロピオネートである。これらのセルロースエステルは単独或いは混合して用いることができる。 The cellulose ester is preferably a lower fatty acid ester of cellulose. Lower fatty acid means a fatty acid having 6 or less carbon atoms. Examples of the lower fatty acid ester of cellulose include, for example, cellulose acetate, cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose butyrate and the like, and mixed fatty acid esters such as cellulose acetate propionate and cellulose acetate butyrate. it can. Particularly preferably used lower fatty acid esters of cellulose are cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, and cellulose acetate propionate. These cellulose esters can be used alone or in combination.
 セルロースジアセテートは、平均酢化度(結合酢酸量)51.0%~56.0%のものが好ましく用いられる。市販品としては、(株)ダイセル製のL20、L30、L40、L50、イーストマンケミカルジャパン(株)製のCa398-3、Ca398-6、Ca398-10、Ca398-30、Ca394-60Sが挙げられる。 Cellulose diacetate preferably has an average degree of acetylation (bound acetic acid amount) of 51.0% to 56.0%. Commercially available products include L20, L30, L40, and L50 manufactured by Daicel Corporation, and Ca398-3, Ca398-6, Ca398-10, Ca398-30, and Ca394-60S manufactured by Eastman Chemical Japan Co., Ltd. .
 セルローストリアセテートは、平均酢化度(結合酢酸量)54.0~62.5%のものが好ましく用いられ、更に好ましいのは、平均酢化度が58.0~62.5%のセルローストリアセテートである。 The cellulose triacetate preferably has an average degree of acetylation (bound acetic acid amount) of 54.0 to 62.5%, and more preferably cellulose triacetate having an average degree of acetylation of 58.0 to 62.5%. is there.
 セルローストリアセテートは、セルローストリアセテートAと、セルローストリアセテートBとを含有することが好ましい。セルローストリアセテートAは、数平均分子量(Mn)が125000以上155000未満であり、重量平均分子量(Mw)が265000以上310000未満であり、Mw/Mnが1.9~2.1であるセルローストリアセテートである。セルローストリアセテートBは、アセチル基置換度が2.75~2.90であり、Mnが155000以上180000未満であり、Mwが290000以上360000未満であり、Mw/Mnが1.8~2.0であるセルローストリアセテートである。 The cellulose triacetate preferably contains cellulose triacetate A and cellulose triacetate B. Cellulose triacetate A is a cellulose triacetate having a number average molecular weight (Mn) of 125,000 or more and less than 155000, a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 265,000 or more and less than 310,000, and Mw / Mn of 1.9 to 2.1. . Cellulose triacetate B has an acetyl group substitution degree of 2.75 to 2.90, Mn of 155,000 or more and less than 180,000, Mw of 290000 or more and less than 360,000, and Mw / Mn of 1.8 to 2.0. A cellulose triacetate.
 セルロースアセテートプロピオネートは、炭素原子数2~4のアシル基を置換基として有し、アセチル基の置換度をXとし、プロピオニル基又はブチリル基の置換度をYとしたとき、下記式(I)及び(II)を同時に満たすものであることが好ましい。
 式(I) 2.6≦X+Y≦3.0
 式(II) 0≦X≦2.5
Cellulose acetate propionate has an acyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms as a substituent, and when the substitution degree of acetyl group is X and the substitution degree of propionyl group or butyryl group is Y, the following formula (I ) And (II) are preferably satisfied at the same time.
Formula (I) 2.6 ≦ X + Y ≦ 3.0
Formula (II) 0 ≦ X ≦ 2.5
 中でも、1.9≦X≦2.5、0.1≦Y≦0.9であることが好ましい。 Among them, it is preferable that 1.9 ≦ X ≦ 2.5 and 0.1 ≦ Y ≦ 0.9.
 上記アシル基の置換度の測定方法は、ASTM-D817-96に準じて測定することができる。セルロースエステルの数平均分子量(Mn)及び分子量分布(Mw)は、高速液体クロマトグラフィーを用いて測定できる。測定条件は以下の通りである。
 溶媒:メチレンクロライド
 カラム:Shodex K806、K805、K803G
(昭和電工(株)製を3本接続して使用した)
 カラム温度:25℃
 試料濃度:0.1質量%
 検出器:RI Model 504(GLサイエンス社製)
 ポンプ:L6000(日立製作所(株)製)
 流量:1.0ml/min
 校正曲線:標準ポリスチレンSTK standard ポリスチレン(東ソー(株)
製)Mw=1000000~500迄の13サンプルによる校正曲線を使用した。13サンプルは、ほぼ等間隔に用いることが好ましい。
The method for measuring the substitution degree of the acyl group can be measured according to ASTM-D817-96. The number average molecular weight (Mn) and molecular weight distribution (Mw) of the cellulose ester can be measured using high performance liquid chromatography. The measurement conditions are as follows.
Solvent: Methylene chloride Column: Shodex K806, K805, K803G
(Used by connecting three Showa Denko Co., Ltd.)
Column temperature: 25 ° C
Sample concentration: 0.1% by mass
Detector: RI Model 504 (GL Science Co., Ltd.)
Pump: L6000 (manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.)
Flow rate: 1.0 ml / min
Calibration curve: Standard polystyrene STK standard polystyrene (Tosoh Corporation)
A calibration curve with 13 samples from Mw = 1000000 to 500 was used. The 13 samples are preferably used at approximately equal intervals.
 (熱可塑性アクリル樹脂)
 フィルム基材は、セルロース系樹脂に熱可塑性アクリル樹脂を併用して構成されても良い。併用する場合には、熱可塑性アクリル樹脂とセルロース系樹脂の含有質量比が、熱可塑性アクリル樹脂:セルロース系樹脂=95:5~50:50であることが好ましい。
(Thermoplastic acrylic resin)
The film substrate may be configured by using a thermoplastic acrylic resin in combination with a cellulosic resin. When used in combination, the mass ratio of the thermoplastic acrylic resin to the cellulose resin is preferably thermoplastic acrylic resin: cellulose resin = 95: 5 to 50:50.
 アクリル樹脂には、メタクリル樹脂も含まれる。アクリル樹脂としては、特に制限されるものではないが、メチルメタクリレート単位50~99質量%、及びこれと共重合可能な他の単量体単位1~50質量%からなるものが好ましい。共重合可能な他の単量体としては、アルキル数の炭素数が2~18のアルキルメタクリレート、アルキル数の炭素数が
1~18のアルキルアクリレート、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸等のα,β-不飽和酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、イタコン酸等の不飽和基含有二価カルボン酸、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン等の芳香族ビニル化合物、アクリロニトリル、メタクリロニトリル等のα,β-不飽和ニトリル、無水マレイン酸、マレイミド、N-置換マレイミド、グルタル酸無水物等が挙げられ、これらは単独あるいは2種以上を併用してよい。
Acrylic resin also includes methacrylic resin. The acrylic resin is not particularly limited but is preferably composed of 50 to 99% by mass of methyl methacrylate units and 1 to 50% by mass of other monomer units copolymerizable therewith. Examples of other copolymerizable monomers include alkyl methacrylates having 2 to 18 alkyl carbon atoms, alkyl acrylates having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, alkyl acrylates such as acrylic acid and methacrylic acid. Unsaturated group-containing divalent carboxylic acids such as saturated acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid and itaconic acid, aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene and α-methylstyrene, α, β-unsaturated nitriles such as acrylonitrile and methacrylonitrile, Examples thereof include maleic anhydride, maleimide, N-substituted maleimide, glutaric anhydride, and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 これらの中でも共重合体の耐熱分解性や流動性の観点から、メチルアクリレート、エチルアクリレート、n-プロピルアクリレート、n-ブチルアクリレート、s-ブチルアクリレート、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート等が好ましく、メチルアクリレートやn-ブチルアクリレートが特に好ましく用いられる。また、重量平均分子量(Mw)は80000~500000であることが好ましく、更に好ましくは110000~500000の範囲内である。 Of these, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, n-propyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, s-butyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, and the like are preferable from the viewpoint of thermal decomposition resistance and fluidity of the copolymer. -Butyl acrylate is particularly preferably used. Further, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 80,000 to 500,000, more preferably 110,000 to 500,000.
 アクリル樹脂の重量平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーにより測定することができる。アクリル樹脂の市販品としては、例えばデルペット60N、80N(旭化成ケミカルズ(株)製)、ダイヤナールBR52、BR80,BR83,BR85,BR88(三菱レイヨン(株)製)、KT75(電気化学工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。アクリル樹脂は2種以上を併用することもできる。 The weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin can be measured by gel permeation chromatography. Commercially available acrylic resins include, for example, Delpet 60N, 80N (Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation), Dianal BR52, BR80, BR83, BR85, BR88 (Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), KT75 (Electrochemical Industry Co., Ltd.) )) And the like. Two or more acrylic resins can be used in combination.
 (λ/4フィルム)
 フィルム基材として、λ/4フィルムを用いても良い。λ/4フィルムを用いることで、画像表示装置に本実施形態の光学フィルムを組み入れた場合、視認性に優れるばかりか、クロストークにも優れる点から好ましい。
(Λ / 4 film)
A λ / 4 film may be used as the film substrate. By using the λ / 4 film, when the optical film of the present embodiment is incorporated in an image display device, it is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent visibility and crosstalk.
 λ/4フィルムとは、所定の光の波長(通常、可視光領域)に対して、フィルムの面内位相差が約1/4となるフィルムをいう。λ/4フィルムは、可視光の波長の範囲においてほぼ完全な円偏光を得るため、可視光の波長の範囲において概ね波長の1/4の位相差を有する広帯域λ/4フィルムであることが好ましい。 A λ / 4 film refers to a film having an in-plane retardation of the film of about ¼ with respect to a predetermined light wavelength (usually in the visible light region). The λ / 4 film is preferably a broadband λ / 4 film having a phase difference of approximately ¼ of the wavelength in the visible light wavelength range in order to obtain almost perfect circularly polarized light in the visible light wavelength range. .
 λ/4フィルムは、波長550nmで測定した面内リタデーション値Ro(550)が、60nm以上220nm以下の範囲にあることが好ましく、80nm以上200nm以下の範囲であることがより好ましく、90nm以上190nm以下の範囲であることがさらに好ましい。なお、面内リタデーション値Roは、以下の式で表される。
 Ro=(nx-ny)×d
 ただし、式中、nx、nyは、23℃55%RH、波長550nmにおける屈折率のうち、フィルムの面内で最大の屈折率(遅相軸方向の屈折率ともいう)、およびフィルム面内で遅相軸に直交する方向の屈折率であり、dはフィルムの厚み(nm)である。Roは、自動複屈折率計KOBRA-21ADH(王子計測機器(株)製)を用いて、23℃、55%RHの環境下で、各波長での複屈折率測定により算出することができる。
The λ / 4 film has an in-plane retardation value Ro (550) measured at a wavelength of 550 nm, preferably in the range of 60 nm to 220 nm, more preferably in the range of 80 nm to 200 nm, and more preferably in the range of 90 nm to 190 nm. More preferably, it is the range. The in-plane retardation value Ro is represented by the following formula.
Ro = (nx−ny) × d
However, in the formula, nx and ny are the maximum refractive index in the plane of the film (also referred to as the refractive index in the slow axis direction) out of the refractive index at 23 ° C. and 55% RH and the wavelength of 550 nm, and in the plane of the film. It is the refractive index in the direction perpendicular to the slow axis, and d is the thickness (nm) of the film. Ro can be calculated by measuring the birefringence at each wavelength in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH using an automatic birefringence meter KOBRA-21ADH (manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments).
 さらに、λ/4フィルムとして有効に機能するためには、同時に、Ro(590)-Ro(450)≧2nmの関係を満足することが好ましく、Ro(590)-Ro(450)≧5nmであることがより好ましく、Ro(590)-Ro(450)≧10nmであることがさらに好ましい。なお、Ro(A)は、波長Anmで測定した面内リタデーション値を指す。 Furthermore, in order to function effectively as a λ / 4 film, it is preferable that the relationship of Ro (590) −Ro (450) ≧ 2 nm is satisfied at the same time, and Ro (590) −Ro (450) ≧ 5 nm. More preferably, Ro (590) −Ro (450) ≧ 10 nm is more preferable. Note that Ro (A) indicates an in-plane retardation value measured at a wavelength of Anm.
 λ/4フィルムの遅相軸と後述する偏光子の透過軸との角度が実質的に45°になるように積層すると円偏光板が得られる。実質的に45°とは、30°~60°の範囲、より望ましくは40°~50°の範囲であることを意味する。λ/4フィルムの面内の遅相軸と偏光子の透過軸との角度は、41~49°であることが好ましく、42~48°であることがより好ましく、43~47°であることがより一層好ましく、44~46°であることがさらに好ましい。 A circularly polarizing plate is obtained by laminating so that the angle between the slow axis of the λ / 4 film and the transmission axis of the polarizer described later is substantially 45 °. Substantially 45 ° means in the range of 30 ° to 60 °, more preferably in the range of 40 ° to 50 °. The angle between the in-plane slow axis of the λ / 4 film and the transmission axis of the polarizer is preferably 41 to 49 °, more preferably 42 to 48 °, and 43 to 47 °. Is more preferably 44 to 46 °.
 λ/4フィルムとしては、光学的に透明な樹脂であれば特に限定はなく、例えば、アクリル系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、シクロオレフィン系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリ乳酸系樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、前述したセルロース系樹脂などを用いることができる。中でも、耐薬品性の観点から、λ/4フィルムは、セルロース系樹脂またはポリカーボネート系樹脂であることが好ましい。また、耐熱性の観点から、λ/4フィルムは、セルロース系樹脂であることが好ましい。 The λ / 4 film is not particularly limited as long as it is an optically transparent resin. For example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a cycloolefin resin, a polyester resin, a polylactic acid resin, a polyvinyl alcohol resin, The cellulose-based resin described above can be used. Among these, from the viewpoint of chemical resistance, the λ / 4 film is preferably a cellulose resin or a polycarbonate resin. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, the λ / 4 film is preferably a cellulose resin.
 (リタデーション調整剤)
 λ/4のリタデーション調整は、前述したフィルム基材にリタデーション調整剤を添加することで行うことができる。リタデーション調整剤としては、欧州特許911,656A2号明細書に記載されているような、二つ以上の芳香族環を有する芳香族化合物を使用することができる。
(Retardation adjuster)
The retardation adjustment of λ / 4 can be performed by adding a retardation adjusting agent to the film base described above. As the retardation adjusting agent, an aromatic compound having two or more aromatic rings as described in the specification of European Patent 911,656A2 can be used.
 また、2種類以上の芳香族化合物を併用してもよい。該芳香族化合物の芳香族環には、芳香族炭化水素環に加えて、芳香族性ヘテロ環が含まれる。芳香族性ヘテロ環であることが特に好ましく、芳香族性ヘテロ環は一般に、不飽和ヘテロ環である。中でも1,3,5-トリアジン環が特に好ましい。 Two or more aromatic compounds may be used in combination. The aromatic ring of the aromatic compound includes an aromatic heterocycle in addition to an aromatic hydrocarbon ring. Particularly preferred is an aromatic heterocycle, and the aromatic heterocycle is generally an unsaturated heterocycle. Of these, a 1,3,5-triazine ring is particularly preferred.
 (微粒子)
 フィルム基材には、取扱性を向上させるため、例えばアクリル粒子、二酸化ケイ素、二酸化チタン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ジルコニウム、炭酸カルシウム、カオリン、タルク、焼成ケイ酸カルシウム、水和ケイ酸カルシウム、ケイ酸アルミニウム、ケイ酸マグネシウム、リン酸カルシウム等の無機微粒子や架橋高分子などのマット剤を含有させることが好ましい。また、アクリル粒子は、特に限定されるものではないが、多層構造アクリル系粒状複合体であることが好ましい。これらの中でも二酸化ケイ素がフィルム基材のヘイズを小さくできる点で好ましい。微粒子の1次平均粒子径としては、20nm以下が好ましく、更に好ましくは、5~16nmの範囲内であり、特に好ましくは、5~12nmの範囲内である。
(Fine particles)
In order to improve the handling property, for example, acrylic particles, silicon dioxide, titanium dioxide, aluminum oxide, zirconium oxide, calcium carbonate, kaolin, talc, calcined calcium silicate, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate Further, it is preferable to contain inorganic fine particles such as magnesium silicate and calcium phosphate and a matting agent such as a crosslinked polymer. The acrylic particles are not particularly limited, but are preferably multi-layered acrylic granular composites. Among these, silicon dioxide is preferable in that the haze of the film substrate can be reduced. The primary average particle diameter of the fine particles is preferably 20 nm or less, more preferably in the range of 5 to 16 nm, and particularly preferably in the range of 5 to 12 nm.
 (エステル化合物)
 フィルム基材は、環境変化での寸法安定性の観点から、下記一般式(X)で表されるエステル化合物又は糖エステルを含有することが好ましい。先ずは、一般式(X)で表されるエステル化合物について説明する。
(Ester compound)
It is preferable that a film base material contains the ester compound or sugar ester represented by the following general formula (X) from a viewpoint of the dimensional stability by environmental change. First, the ester compound represented by the general formula (X) will be described.
 一般式(X)B-(G-A)n-G-B
(式中、Bはヒドロキシ基又はカルボン酸残基、Gは炭素数2~12のアルキレングリコール残基又は炭素数6~12のアリールグリコール残基又は炭素数が4~12のオキシアルキレングリコール残基、Aは炭素数4~12のアルキレンジカルボン酸残基又は炭素数6~12のアリールジカルボン酸残基を表す。nは1以上の整数を表す。)
Formula (X) B- (GA) n-GB
Wherein B is a hydroxy group or carboxylic acid residue, G is an alkylene glycol residue having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, an aryl glycol residue having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or an oxyalkylene glycol residue having 4 to 12 carbon atoms. A represents an alkylene dicarboxylic acid residue having 4 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl dicarboxylic acid residue having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 1 or more.)
 一般式(X)において、炭素数2~12のアルキレングリコール成分としては、エチレングリコール、1,2-プロピレングリコール、1,3-プロピレングリコール、1,2-ブタンジオール、1,3-ブタンジオール、1,2-プロパンジオール、2-メチル1,3-プロパンジオール、1,4-ブタンジオール、1,5-ペンタンジオール、2,2-ジメチル-1,3-プロパンジオール(ネオペンチルグリコール)、2,2-ジエチル-1,3-プロパンジオール(3,3-ジメチロールペンタン)、2-n-ブチル-2-エチル-1,3プロパンジオール(3,3-ジメチロールヘプタン)、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジオール1,6-ヘキサンジオール、2,2,4-トリメチル1,3-ペンタンジオール、2-エチル1,3-ヘキサンジオール、2-メチル1,8-オクタンジオール、1,9-ノナンジオール、1,10-デカンジオール、1,12-オクタデカンジオール等があり、これらのグリコールは、1種又は2種以上の混合物として使用される。特に炭素数2~12のアルキレングリコールがセルロースアセテートとの相溶性に優れているため、特に好ましい。炭素数6~12のアリールグリコール成分としては、例えば、ハイドロキノン、レゾルシン、ビスフェノールA、ビスフェノールF、ビスフェノール等があり、これらのグリコールは1種又は2種以上の混合物として使用できる。 In the general formula (X), the alkylene glycol component having 2 to 12 carbon atoms includes ethylene glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,2-butanediol, 1,3-butanediol, 1,2-propanediol, 2-methyl 1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 2,2-dimethyl-1,3-propanediol (neopentyl glycol), 2 , 2-diethyl-1,3-propanediol (3,3-dimethylolpentane), 2-n-butyl-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol (3,3-dimethylolheptane), 3-methyl- 1,5-pentanediol 1,6-hexanediol, 2,2,4-trimethyl 1,3-pentanediol, 2-ethyl 1 There are 3-hexanediol, 2-methyl 1,8-octanediol, 1,9-nonanediol, 1,10-decanediol, 1,12-octadecanediol, and the like. Used as a mixture. In particular, alkylene glycols having 2 to 12 carbon atoms are particularly preferable because of excellent compatibility with cellulose acetate. Examples of the aryl glycol component having 6 to 12 carbon atoms include hydroquinone, resorcin, bisphenol A, bisphenol F, bisphenol and the like, and these glycols can be used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
 また、炭素数4~12のオキシアルキレングリコール成分としては、例えば、ジエチレングリコール、トリエチレングリコール、テトラエチレングリコール、ジプロピレングリコール、トリプロピレングリコール等があり、これらのグリコールは、1種又は2種以上の混合物として使用できる。炭素数4~12のアルキレンジカルボン酸成分としては、例えば、コハク酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、グルタル酸、アジピン酸、アゼライン酸、セバシン酸、ドデカンジカルボン酸等があり、これらは、それぞれ1種又は2種以上の混合物として使用される。炭素数6~12のアリーレンジカルボン酸成分としては、フタル酸、テレフタル酸、イソフタル酸、1,5ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,4ナフタレンジカルボン酸等がある。以下に、一般式(X)で表される化合物の具体例(化合物X-1~化合物X-17)を示すが、これに限定されない。 Examples of the oxyalkylene glycol component having 4 to 12 carbon atoms include diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, and tripropylene glycol. These glycols may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Can be used as a mixture. Examples of the alkylene dicarboxylic acid component having 4 to 12 carbon atoms include succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, dodecanedicarboxylic acid, and the like. Used as a mixture of two or more. Examples of the arylene dicarboxylic acid component having 6 to 12 carbon atoms include phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, 1,5 naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, and 1,4 naphthalene dicarboxylic acid. Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (X) (compound X-1 to compound X-17) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 (糖エステル化合物)
 次に糖エステル化合物について説明する。糖エステル化合物としては、セルロースエステル以外のエステルであって、下記単糖、二糖、三糖又はオリゴ糖などの糖のOH基のすべてもしくは一部をエステル化した化合物である。糖としては例えば、グルコース、ガラクトース、マンノース、フルクトース、キシロース、アラビノース、ラクトース、スクロース、ニストース、1F-フラクトシルニストース、スタキオース、マルチトール、ラクチトール、ラクチュロース、セロビオース、マルトース、セロトリオース、マルトトリオース、ラフィノース及びケストースを挙げることができる。このほか、ゲンチオビオース、ゲンチオトリオース、ゲンチオテトラオース、キシロトリオース、ガラクトシルスクロースなども挙げられる。これらの化合物の中で、特にフラノース構造及び/又はピラノース構造を有する化合物が好ましい。これらの中でも、スクロース、ケストース、ニストース、1F-フラクトシルニストース、スタキオースなどが好ましく、さらに好ましくは、スクロースである。また、オリゴ糖として、マルトオリゴ糖、イソマルトオリゴ糖、フラクトオリゴ糖、ガラクトオリゴ糖、キシロオリゴ糖も好ましく使用することができる。
(Sugar ester compound)
Next, the sugar ester compound will be described. The sugar ester compound is an ester other than cellulose ester, and is a compound obtained by esterifying all or part of the OH group of a sugar such as the following monosaccharide, disaccharide, trisaccharide or oligosaccharide. Examples of the sugar include glucose, galactose, mannose, fructose, xylose, arabinose, lactose, sucrose, nystose, 1F-fructosyl nystose, stachyose, maltitol, lactitol, lactulose, cellobiose, maltose, cellotriose, maltotriose, raffinose And kestose. In addition, gentiobiose, gentiotriose, gentiotetraose, xylotriose, galactosyl sucrose, and the like are also included. Among these compounds, compounds having a furanose structure and / or a pyranose structure are particularly preferable. Among these, sucrose, kestose, nystose, 1F-fructosyl nystose, stachyose and the like are preferable, and sucrose is more preferable. As oligosaccharides, maltooligosaccharides, isomaltooligosaccharides, fructooligosaccharides, galactooligosaccharides, and xylo-oligosaccharides can also be preferably used.
 糖をエステル化するのに用いられるモノカルボン酸は、特に制限はなく、公知の脂肪族モノカルボン酸、脂環族モノカルボン酸、芳香族モノカルボン酸等を用いることができる。使用するカルボン酸は1種類でもよいし、2種以上の混合であってもよい。好ましい脂肪族モノカルボン酸としては、酢酸、プロピオン酸、酪酸、イソ酪酸、吉草酸、カプロン酸、エナント酸、カプリル酸、ペラルゴン酸、カプリン酸、2-エチルーヘキサンカルボン酸、ウンデシル酸、ラウリン酸、トリデシル酸、ミリスチン酸、ペンタデシル酸、パルミチン酸、ヘプタデシル酸、ステアリン酸、ノナデカン酸、アラキン酸、べヘン酸、リグノセリン酸、セロチン酸、ヘプタコサン酸、モンタン酸、メリシン酸、ラクセル酸等の飽和脂肪酸、ウンデシレン酸、オレイン酸、ソルビン酸、リノール酸、リノレン酸、アラキドン酸、オクテン酸等の不飽和脂肪酸等を挙げることができる。好ましい脂環族モノカルボン酸の例としては、シクロペンタンカルボン酸、シクロヘキサンカルボン酸、シクロオクタンカルボン酸、又はそれらの誘導体を挙げることができる。好ましい芳香族モノカルボン酸の例としては、安息香酸、安息香酸のベンゼン環にアルキル基、アルコキシ基を導入した芳香族モノカルボン酸、ケイ皮酸、ベンジル酸、ビフェニルカルボン酸、ナフタリンカルボン酸、テトラリンカルボン酸等のベンゼン環を2個以上有する芳香族モノカルボン酸、又はそれらの誘導体を挙げることができ、より具体的には、キシリル酸、ヘメリト酸、メシチレン酸、プレーニチル酸、γ-イソジュリル酸、ジュリル酸、メシト酸、α-イソジュリル酸、クミン酸、α-トルイル酸、ヒドロアトロパ酸、アトロパ酸、ヒドロケイ皮酸、サリチル酸、o-、m、p-アニス酸、クレオソート酸、o-、m、p-ホモサリチル酸、o-ピロカテク酸、β-レソルシル酸、バニリン酸、イソバニリン酸、ベラトルム酸、o-ベラトルム酸、没食子酸、アサロン酸、マンデル酸、ホモアニス酸、ホモバニリン酸、ホモベラトルム酸、o-ホモベラトルム酸、フタロン酸、p-クマル酸を挙げることができるが、特に安息香酸が好ましい。エステル化したエステル化合物の中では、エステル化によりアセチル基が導入されたアセチル化合物が好ましい。以下に本実施形態に用いられ得る糖エステル化合物の具体例を示すが、これらに限定されない。 The monocarboxylic acid used for esterifying the sugar is not particularly limited, and known aliphatic monocarboxylic acid, alicyclic monocarboxylic acid, aromatic monocarboxylic acid and the like can be used. The carboxylic acid to be used may be one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds. Preferred aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, enanthic acid, caprylic acid, pelargonic acid, capric acid, 2-ethyl-hexanecarboxylic acid, undecylic acid, lauric acid , Saturated fatty acids such as tridecylic acid, myristic acid, pentadecylic acid, palmitic acid, heptadecylic acid, stearic acid, nonadecanoic acid, arachidic acid, behenic acid, lignoceric acid, serotic acid, heptacosanoic acid, montanic acid, melicic acid, and laxelic acid And unsaturated fatty acids such as undecylenic acid, oleic acid, sorbic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, arachidonic acid and octenoic acid. Examples of preferred alicyclic monocarboxylic acids include cyclopentane carboxylic acid, cyclohexane carboxylic acid, cyclooctane carboxylic acid, or derivatives thereof. Examples of preferred aromatic monocarboxylic acids include benzoic acid, aromatic monocarboxylic acids having an alkyl group or alkoxy group introduced into the benzene ring of benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, benzylic acid, biphenylcarboxylic acid, naphthalenecarboxylic acid, tetralin An aromatic monocarboxylic acid having two or more benzene rings such as carboxylic acid, or a derivative thereof can be mentioned, and more specifically, xylic acid, hemelic acid, mesitylene acid, planicylic acid, γ-isojurylic acid, Julylic acid, mesitic acid, α-isoduric acid, cumic acid, α-toluic acid, hydroatropic acid, atropic acid, hydrocinnamic acid, salicylic acid, o-, m, p-anisic acid, creosote acid, o-, m, p-homosalicylic acid, o-pyrocatechuic acid, β-resorcylic acid, vanillic acid, isovanillic acid, veratrum acid o- veratric acid, gallic acid, asarone acid, mandelic acid, homoanisic acid, homovanillic acid, homoveratric acid, o- homoveratric acid, Futaron acid, can be mentioned p- coumaric acid, especially benzoic acid. Among the ester compounds esterified, an acetyl compound into which an acetyl group has been introduced by esterification is preferable. Although the specific example of the sugar ester compound which can be used for this embodiment below is shown, it is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 糖エステル化合物は、一般式(Y)で示される化合物が好ましい。以下に、一般式(Y)で示される化合物について説明する。 The sugar ester compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Y). Below, the compound shown by general formula (Y) is demonstrated.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 (式中、R1~R8は、水素原子、置換若しくは無置換の炭素数2~22のアルキルカルボニル基、或いは、置換又は無置換の炭素数2~22のアリールカルボニル基を表し、R1~R8は、同じであっても、異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
(Wherein, R 1 ~ R 8 is a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 22 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group having 2 to 22 carbon atoms, R 1 R 8 may be the same or different.
 以下に一般式(Y)で示される化合物をより具体的(化合物Y-1~化合物Y-23)に示すが、これらに限定はされない。なお、下表において平均置換度が8.0未満の場合、R1~R8のうちのいずれかは水素原子を表す。 The compounds represented by formula (Y) are shown below in more detail (compound Y-1 to compound Y-23), but are not limited thereto. In the table below, when the average substitution degree is less than 8.0, any one of R 1 to R 8 represents a hydrogen atom.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 置換度分布は、エステル化反応時間の調節、又は置換度違いの化合物を混合することにより目的の置換度に調整できる。 The substitution degree distribution can be adjusted to the desired substitution degree by adjusting the esterification reaction time or mixing compounds with different substitution degrees.
 一般式(X)で表わされるエステル化合物又は糖エステル化合物は、セルロースアセテートフィルムに、1~30質量%含有させることが好ましく、5~25質量%含有させることがより好ましく、5~20質量%含有させることが特に好ましい。 The ester compound or sugar ester compound represented by the general formula (X) is preferably contained in the cellulose acetate film in an amount of 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 5 to 25% by mass. It is particularly preferred that
 (可塑剤)
 フィルム基材は、必要に応じて可塑剤を含有しても良い。可塑剤としては、特に限定されないが、多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤、グリコレート系可塑剤、フタル酸エステル系可塑剤、リン酸エステル系可塑剤、多価アルコールエステル系可塑剤、アクリル系可塑剤等が挙げられる。これらの中では、後述するリタデーション値にフィルム基材を制御しやすい点から、アクリル系可塑剤が好ましい。
(Plasticizer)
The film substrate may contain a plasticizer as necessary. The plasticizer is not particularly limited, but is a polycarboxylic acid ester plasticizer, glycolate plasticizer, phthalate ester plasticizer, phosphate ester plasticizer, polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer, acrylic plasticizer. Agents and the like. In these, an acrylic plasticizer is preferable from the point which can control a film base material to the retardation value mentioned later.
 多価アルコールエステル系可塑剤は、2価以上の脂肪族多価アルコールとモノカルボン酸のエステルよりなる可塑剤であり、分子内に芳香環又はシクロアルキル環を有することが好ましい。好ましくは2~20価の脂肪族多価アルコールエステルである。以下に、多価アルコールエステル系可塑剤の具体的例を示すがこれらに限定されるものではない。 The polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer is a plasticizer composed of an ester of a divalent or higher aliphatic polyhydric alcohol and a monocarboxylic acid, and preferably has an aromatic ring or a cycloalkyl ring in the molecule. A divalent to 20-valent aliphatic polyhydric alcohol ester is preferred. Specific examples of the polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 グリコレート系可塑剤としては、特に限定されないが、アルキルフタリルアルキルグリコレート類を好ましく用いることができる。アルキルフタリルアルキルグリコレート類としては、例えばメチルフタリルメチルグリコレート、エチルフタリルエチルグリコレート、プロピルフタリルプロピルグリコレート、ブチルフタリルブチルグリコレート、オクチルフタリルオクチルグリコレート、メチルフタリルエチルグリコレート、エチルフタリルメチルグリコレート、エチルフタリルプロピルグリコレート、メチルフタリルブチルグリコレート、エチルフタリルブチルグリコレート、ブチルフタリルメチルグリコレート、ブチルフタリルエチルグリコレート、プロピルフタリルブチルグリコレート、ブチルフタリルプロピルグリコレート、メチルフタリルオクチルグリコレート、エチルフタリルオクチルグリコレート、オクチルフタリルメチルグリコレート、オクチルフタリルエチルグリコレート等が挙げられる。 The glycolate plasticizer is not particularly limited, but alkylphthalylalkyl glycolates can be preferably used. Examples of alkyl phthalyl alkyl glycolates include methyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, propyl phthalyl propyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, octyl phthalyl octyl glycolate, methyl phthalyl ethyl Glycolate, ethyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl propyl glycolate, methyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, propyl phthalyl butyl glycol Butyl phthalyl propyl glycolate, methyl phthalyl octyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl octyl glycolate, octyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, octyl phthalate Ethyl glycolate, and the like.
 フタル酸エステル系可塑剤としては、ジエチルフタレート、ジメトキシエチルフタレート、ジメチルフタレート、ジオクチルフタレート、ジブチルフタレート、ジ-2-エチルヘキシルフタレート、ジオクチルフタレート、ジシクロヘキシルフタレート、ジシクロヘキシルテレフタレート等が挙げられる。 Examples of the phthalate ester plasticizer include diethyl phthalate, dimethoxyethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, dicyclohexyl phthalate, and dicyclohexyl terephthalate.
 リン酸エステル系可塑剤としては、トリフェニルホスフェート、トリクレジルホスフェート、クレジルジフェニルホスフェート、オクチルジフェニルホスフェート、ジフェニルビフェニルホスフェート、トリオクチルホスフェート、トリブチルホスフェート等が挙げられる。 Examples of the phosphate ester plasticizer include triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, cresyl diphenyl phosphate, octyl diphenyl phosphate, diphenyl biphenyl phosphate, trioctyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate, and the like.
 多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤は2価以上、好ましくは2価~20価の多価カルボン酸とアルコールのエステルよりなる化合物である。具体例としては、トリエチルシトレート、トリブチルシトレート、アセチルトリエチルシトレート(ATEC)、アセチルトリブチルシトレート(ATBC)、ベンゾイルトリブチルシトレート、アセチルトリフェニルシトレート、アセチルトリベンジルシトレート、酒石酸ジブチル、酒石酸ジアセチルジブチル、トリメリット酸トリブチル、ピロメリット酸テトラブチル等が挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。 The polycarboxylic acid ester plasticizer is a compound composed of an ester of a divalent or higher, preferably a divalent to 20-valent polyvalent carboxylic acid and an alcohol. Specific examples include triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate, acetyl triethyl citrate (ATEC), acetyl tributyl citrate (ATBC), benzoyl tributyl citrate, acetyl triphenyl citrate, acetyl tribenzyl citrate, dibutyl tartrate, tartaric acid Examples include, but are not limited to, diacetyldibutyl, tributyl trimellitic acid, tetrabutyl pyromellitic acid, and the like.
 アクリル系可塑剤としてはアクリル系ポリマーが好ましく、アクリル系ポリマーはアクリル酸又はメタクリル酸アルキルエステルのホモポリマー又はコポリマーが好ましい。アクリル酸エステルのモノマーとしては、例えば、アクリル酸メチル、アクリル酸エチル、アクリル酸プロピル(i-、n-)、アクリル酸ブチル(n-、i-、s-、t-)、アクリル酸ペンチル(n-、i-、s-)、アクリル酸ヘキシル(n-、i-)、アクリル酸ヘプチル(n-、i-)、アクリル酸オクチル(n-、i-)、アクリル酸ノニル(n-、i-)、アクリル酸ミリスチル(n-、i-)、アクリル酸(2-エチルヘキシル)、アクリル酸(ε-カプロラクトン)、アクリル酸(2-ヒドロキシエチル)、アクリル酸(2-ヒドロキシプロピル)、アクリル酸(3-ヒドロキシプロピル)、アクリル酸(4-ヒドロキシブチル)、アクリル酸(2-ヒドロキシブチル)、アクリル酸(2-メトキシエチル)、アクリル酸(2-エトキシエチル)等、又は上記アクリル酸エステルをメタクリル酸エステルに変えたものを挙げることができる。アクリル系ポリマーは上記モノマーのホモポリマー又はコポリマーであるが、アクリル酸メチルエステルモノマー単位を30質量%以上有していることが好ましく、またメタクリル酸メチルエステルモノマー単位を40質量%以上有していることが好ましい。特にアクリル酸メチル又はメタクリル酸メチルのホモポリマーが好ましい。 The acrylic plasticizer is preferably an acrylic polymer, and the acrylic polymer is preferably a homopolymer or copolymer of acrylic acid or alkyl methacrylate. Examples of the acrylate monomer include methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate (i-, n-), butyl acrylate (n-, i-, s-, t-), pentyl acrylate ( n-, i-, s-), hexyl acrylate (n-, i-), heptyl acrylate (n-, i-), octyl acrylate (n-, i-), nonyl acrylate (n-, i-), myristyl acrylate (n-, i-), acrylic acid (2-ethylhexyl), acrylic acid (ε-caprolactone), acrylic acid (2-hydroxyethyl), acrylic acid (2-hydroxypropyl), acrylic Acid (3-hydroxypropyl), acrylic acid (4-hydroxybutyl), acrylic acid (2-hydroxybutyl), acrylic acid (2-methoxyethyl), acrylic acid 2-ethoxyethyl), etc., or the acrylic acid ester may include those obtained by changing the methacrylic acid ester. The acrylic polymer is a homopolymer or copolymer of the above monomer, but preferably has 30% by mass or more of acrylic acid methyl ester monomer units, and has 40% by mass or more of methacrylic acid methyl ester monomer units. It is preferable. In particular, a homopolymer of methyl acrylate or methyl methacrylate is preferred.
 なお、本実施形態のフィルム基材に、上述した可塑剤を含有させる場合、セルロースアセテートに対し、1~50質量%含有させることが好ましく、5~35質量%含有させることがより好ましく、5~25質量%含有させることが特に好ましい。 When the above-mentioned plasticizer is contained in the film base material of this embodiment, it is preferably contained in an amount of 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 35% by mass with respect to cellulose acetate. It is particularly preferable to contain 25% by mass.
 (紫外線吸収剤)
 本実施形態のフィルム基材は、紫外線吸収剤を含有していてもよい。紫外線吸収剤は400nm以下の紫外線を吸収するため、耐久性を向上させるができる。紫外線吸収剤は、特に波長370nmでの透過率が10%以下となるものであることが好ましく、より好ましくは上記透過率が5%以下、更に好ましくは2%以下である。紫外線吸収剤の具体例としては特に限定されないが、例えば、オキシベンゾフェノン系化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物、サリチル酸エステル系化合物、ベンゾフェノン系化合物、シアノアクリレート系化合物、トリアジン系化合物、ニッケル錯塩系化合物、無機粉体等が挙げられる。
(UV absorber)
The film base material of this embodiment may contain an ultraviolet absorber. Since the ultraviolet absorber absorbs ultraviolet rays of 400 nm or less, durability can be improved. In particular, the ultraviolet absorber preferably has a transmittance of 10% or less at a wavelength of 370 nm, more preferably 5% or less, and still more preferably 2% or less. Specific examples of the ultraviolet absorber are not particularly limited. For example, oxybenzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, salicylic acid ester compounds, benzophenone compounds, cyanoacrylate compounds, triazine compounds, nickel complex salts, inorganic powders. Examples include the body.
 より具体的には、例えば、5-クロロ-2-(3,5-ジ-sec-ブチル-2-ヒドロキシルフェニル)-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール、(2-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-6-(直鎖及び側鎖ドデシル)-4-メチルフェノール、2-ヒドロキシ-4-ベンジルオキシベンゾフェノン、2,4-ベンジルオキシベンゾフェノン等を用いることができる。これらは、市販品を用いてもよく、例えば、BASFジャパン社製のチヌビン109、チヌビン171、チヌビン234、チヌビン326、チヌビン327、チヌビン328等のチヌビン類を好ましく使用できる。 More specifically, for example, 5-chloro-2- (3,5-di-sec-butyl-2-hydroxylphenyl) -2H-benzotriazole, (2-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -6 -(Linear and side chain dodecyl) -4-methylphenol, 2-hydroxy-4-benzyloxybenzophenone, 2,4-benzyloxybenzophenone, and the like can be used. Commercially available products may be used. For example, TINUVIN such as TINUVIN 109, TINUVIN 171, TINUVIN 234, TINUVIN 326, TINUVIN 327, and TINUVIN 328 manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd. can be preferably used.
 好ましく用いられる紫外線吸収剤は、ベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤、トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤であり、特に好ましくはベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤などである。この他、1,3,5トリアジン環を有する化合物等の円盤状化合物も紫外線吸収剤として好ましく用いられる。また、紫外線吸収剤としては高分子紫外線吸収剤も好ましく用いることができ、特にポリマータイプの紫外線吸収剤が好ましく用いられる。 Preferably used ultraviolet absorbers are benzotriazole ultraviolet absorbers, benzophenone ultraviolet absorbers, and triazine ultraviolet absorbers, and particularly preferably benzotriazole ultraviolet absorbers and benzophenone ultraviolet absorbers. In addition, a discotic compound such as a compound having a 1,3,5 triazine ring is also preferably used as the ultraviolet absorber. As the UV absorber, a polymer UV absorber can be preferably used, and a polymer type UV absorber is particularly preferably used.
 ベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤としては、市販品であるBASFジャパン社製のTINUVIN 109(オクチル-3-[3-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-5-(5-クロロ―2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)フェニル]プロピオネートと2-エチルヘキシル-3-[3-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-5-(5-クロロ―2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)フェニル]プロピオネートの混合物)、TINUVIN 928(2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-6-(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)-4-(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)フェノール)などを用いることができる。トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤としては、市販品であるBASFジャパン社製のTINUVIN 400(2-(4,6-ビス(2,4-ジメチルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル)-5-ヒドロキシフェニルとオキシランとの反応生成物)、TINUVIN 460(2,4-ビス[2-ヒドロキシ-4-ブトキシフェニル]-6-(2,4-ジブトキシフェニル)-1,3-5-トリアジン)、TINUVIN 405(2-(2,4-ジヒドロキシフェニル)-4,6-ビス-(2,4-ジメチルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジンと(2-エチルヘキシル)-グリシド酸エステルの反応生成物)などを用いることができる。 As the benzotriazole ultraviolet absorber, TINUVIN 109 (octyl-3- [3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5- (5-chloro-2H-benzotriazole-2-) manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd., which is a commercial product, is available. Yl) phenyl] propionate and 2-ethylhexyl-3- [3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5- (5-chloro-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) phenyl] propionate), TINUVIN 928 (2 -(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -6- (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) -4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) phenol) and the like can be used. As the triazine-based ultraviolet absorber, commercially available TINUVIN 400 (2- (4,6-bis (2,4-dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazin-2-yl) -manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.- Reaction product of 5-hydroxyphenyl and oxirane), TINUVIN 460 (2,4-bis [2-hydroxy-4-butoxyphenyl] -6- (2,4-dibutoxyphenyl) -1,3-5 Triazine), TINUVIN 405 (2- (2,4-dihydroxyphenyl) -4,6-bis- (2,4-dimethylphenyl) -1,3,5-triazine and (2-ethylhexyl) -glycidic acid ester Reaction products) and the like.
 紫外線吸収剤の添加方法は、メタノール、エタノール、ブタノール等のアルコールやメチレンクロライド、酢酸メチル、アセトン、ジオキソラン等の有機溶媒あるいはこれらの混合溶媒に紫外線吸収剤を溶解してから、フィルム基材となる樹脂溶液(ドープ)に添加するか、又は直接ドープ組成中に添加してもよい。無機粉体のように有機溶剤に溶解しないものは、有機溶剤とセルロースアセテート中にディゾルバーやサンドミルを使用し、分散してからドープに添加する。 The ultraviolet absorber is added by dissolving the ultraviolet absorber in an alcohol, such as methanol, ethanol, butanol or the like, an organic solvent such as methylene chloride, methyl acetate, acetone, dioxolane, or a mixed solvent thereof, and then becomes a film substrate. It may be added to the resin solution (dope) or directly during the dope composition. For an inorganic powder that does not dissolve in an organic solvent, a dissolver or a sand mill is used in the organic solvent and cellulose acetate to disperse and then added to the dope.
 紫外線吸収剤の使用量は、セルロースアセテートフィルムに対して0.5~10質量%が好ましく、0.6~4質量%が更に好ましい。 The amount of the ultraviolet absorber used is preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.6 to 4% by mass with respect to the cellulose acetate film.
 (酸化防止剤)
 本実施形態のフィルム基材は、さらに酸化防止剤(劣化防止剤)を含有していてもよい。酸化防止剤は、セルロースアセテートフィルム中の残留溶媒量のハロゲンやリン酸系可塑剤のリン酸等によりセルロースアセテートフィルムが分解するのを遅らせたり、防いだりする役割を有する。酸化防止剤としては、ヒンダードフェノール系の化合物が好ましく用いられ、例えば2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ペンタエリスリチル-テトラキス〔3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、トリエチレングリコール-ビス〔3-(3-t-ブチル-5-メチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、1,6-ヘキサンジオール-ビス〔3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、2,4-ビス-(n-オクチルチオ)-6-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-t-ブチルアニリノ)-1,3,5-トリアジン、2,2-チオ-ジエチレンビス〔3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、オクタデシル-3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート、N,N′-ヘキサメチレンビス(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-ヒドロシンナマミド)、1,3,5-トリメチル-2,4,6-トリス(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)ベンゼン、トリス-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)-イソシアヌレート等を挙げることができる。これら化合物の添加量は、セルロースアセテートフィルムに対して、質量割合で1ppm~10000ppmが好ましく、10~1000ppmが更に好ましい。
(Antioxidant)
The film substrate of the present embodiment may further contain an antioxidant (deterioration inhibitor). The antioxidant has a role of delaying or preventing the cellulose acetate film from being decomposed by a residual solvent amount of halogen in the cellulose acetate film, phosphoric acid of a phosphoric acid plasticizer, or the like. As the antioxidant, hindered phenol compounds are preferably used. For example, 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-t-butyl) are used. -4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate], triethylene glycol-bis [3- (3-tert-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate], 1,6-hexanediol-bis [3- (3 5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate], 2,4-bis- (n-octylthio) -6- (4-hydroxy-3,5-di-t-butylanilino) -1,3 5-triazine, 2,2-thio-diethylenebis [3- (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate], octadecyl-3- 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate, N, N'-hexamethylenebis (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-hydrocinnamamide), 1,3 5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tris (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) benzene, tris- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) -isocyanurate Etc. The amount of these compounds added is preferably 1 ppm to 10000 ppm by weight and more preferably 10 to 1000 ppm with respect to the cellulose acetate film.
 (ヒンダードアミン系化合物)
 フィルム基材がセルロースエステルフィルムである場合、フィルム基材は、ヒンダードアミン系化合物を含有していてもよい。ヒンダードアミン系化合物は、酸化防止剤として機能し、N原子近傍にかさ高い有機基(例えば、かさ高い分岐アルキル基)を有する構造である。これは既知の化合物であり、例えば、米国特許第4,619,956号明細書の第5~11欄及び米国特許第4,839,405号明細書の第3~5欄に記載されているように、2,2,6,6-テトラアルキルピペリジン化合物、又はそれらの酸付加塩若しくはそれらと金属化合物との錯体が含まれる。このような化合物には、以下の一般式(H)のものが含まれる。
(Hindered amine compounds)
When the film substrate is a cellulose ester film, the film substrate may contain a hindered amine compound. The hindered amine compound functions as an antioxidant and has a structure having a bulky organic group (for example, a bulky branched alkyl group) in the vicinity of the N atom. This is a known compound and is described, for example, in columns 5-11 of US Pat. No. 4,619,956 and columns 3-5 of US Pat. No. 4,839,405. As such, 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine compounds, or acid addition salts thereof or complexes of them with metal compounds are included. Such compounds include those of the following general formula (H).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 上式中、R1及びR2は、水素原子又は置換基である。 In the above formula, R1 and R2 are a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
 R1が表す置換基には特に限定はないが、窒素原子または酸素原子でピペリジン環と結合する置換基が好ましく、置換基を有していてもよいアミノ基、ヒドロキシル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アシルオキシ基であることがより好ましく、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を置換基として有するアミノ基、ヒドロキシル基、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基であることがさらに好ましい。 The substituent represented by R1 is not particularly limited, but a substituent bonded to the piperidine ring by a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom is preferable, and an amino group, hydroxyl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group which may have a substituent An acyloxy group is more preferable, and an amino group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, or an acyloxy group having an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group as a substituent is more preferable.
 R2が表す置換基には特に限定はないが、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素原子数1~20、より好ましくは1~12、特に好ましくは1~8のものであり、例えばメチル基、エチル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、n-オクチル基、n-デシル基、n-ヘキサデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル、シクロヘキシル基などが挙げられる。)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素原子数2~20、より好ましくは2~12、特に好ましくは2~8であり、例えばビニル基、アリル基、2-ブテニル基、3-ペンテニル基などが挙げられる。)、アルキニル基(好ましくは炭素原子数2~20、より好ましくは2~12、特に好ましくは2~8であり、例えばプロパルギル基、3-ペンチニル基などが挙げられる。)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素原子数6~30、より好ましくは6~20、特に好ましくは6~12であり、例えばフェニル基、ビフェニル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。)、アミノ基(好ましくは炭素原子数0~20、より好ましくは0~10、特に好ましくは0~6であり、例えばアミノ基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジベンジルアミノ基などが挙げられる。)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素原子数1~20、より好ましくは1~12、特に好ましくは1~8であり、例えばメトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基などが挙げられる。)であることが好ましい。 The substituent represented by R2 is not particularly limited, but an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 12, particularly preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, Isopropyl group, tert-butyl group, n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl group, etc.), alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, More preferably, it is 2 to 12, particularly preferably 2 to 8, and examples thereof include vinyl group, allyl group, 2-butenyl group, 3-pentenyl group, etc.), alkynyl group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms) More preferably 2 to 12, particularly preferably 2 to 8, and examples thereof include a propargyl group and a 3-pentynyl group), an aryl group The number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and particularly preferably 6 to 12, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, and the like, and an amino group (preferably a carbon atom number of 0). To 20, more preferably 0 to 10, particularly preferably 0 to 6, and examples thereof include an amino group, a methylamino group, a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a dibenzylamino group, and the like, and an alkoxy group (preferably The number of carbon atoms is 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 12, and particularly preferably 1 to 8, and examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group, and a cyclohexyloxy group.
 ヒンダードアミンの具体例には、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン、1-アリル-4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン、1-ベンジル-4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン、1-(4-t-ブチル-2-ブテニル)-4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン、4-ステアロイルオキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン、1-エチル-4-サリチロイルオキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン、4-メタクリロイルオキシ-1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチルピペリジン、1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチルピペリジン-4-イル-β(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)-プロピオネート、1-ベンジル-2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジニルマレイネート(maleinate)、(ジ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-アジペート、(ジ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-セバケート、(ジ-1,2,3,6-テトラメチル-2,6-ジエチル-ピペリジン-4-イル)-セバケート、(ジ-1-アリル-2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-ピペリジン-4-イル)-フタレート、1-アセチル-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル-アセテート、トリメリト酸-トリ-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)エステル、1-アクリロイル-4-ベンジルオキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン、ジブチル-マロン酸-ジ-(1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-ピペリジン-4-イル)-エステル、ジベンジル-マロン酸-ジ-(1,2,3,6-テトラメチル-2,6-ジエチル-ピペリジン-4-イル)-エステル、ジメチル-ビス-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-オキシ)-シラン,トリス-(1-プロピル-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-ホスフィット、トリス-(1-プロピル-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-ホスフェート,N,N′-ビス-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-ヘキサメチレン-1,6-ジアミン、テトラキス(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)1,2,3,4-ブタンテトラカルボキシレート、テトラキス(1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル)1,2,3,4-ブタンテトラカルボキシレート、N,N′-ビス-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-ヘキサメチレン-1,6-ジアセトアミド、1-アセチル-4-(N-シクロヘキシルアセトアミド)-2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-ピペリジン、4-ベンジルアミノ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン、N,N′-ビス-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-N,N′-ジブチル-アジパミド、N,N′-ビス-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-N,N′-ジシクロヘキシル-(2-ヒドロキシプロピレン)、N,N′-ビス-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)-p-キシリレン-ジアミン、4-(ビス-2-ヒドロキシエチル)-アミノ-1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチルピペリジン、4-メタクリルアミド-1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチルピペリジン、α-シアノ-β-メチル-β-[N-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)]-アミノ-アクリル酸メチルエステルが挙げられる。 Specific examples of hindered amines include 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1-allyl-4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1-benzyl-4-hydroxy -2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1- (4-tert-butyl-2-butenyl) -4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 4-stearoyloxy-2, 2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 1-ethyl-4-salicyloyloxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, 4-methacryloyloxy-1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl Piperidine, 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethylpiperidin-4-yl-β (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) -propionate, 1-benzyl 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidinyl maleate, (di-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) -adipate, (di-2,2 , 6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) -sebacate, (di-1,2,3,6-tetramethyl-2,6-diethyl-piperidin-4-yl) -sebacate, (di-1- Allyl-2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-piperidin-4-yl) -phthalate, 1-acetyl-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl-acetate, trimellitic acid-tri- ( 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) ester, 1-acryloyl-4-benzyloxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, dibutyl-malonic acid-di- (1,2 , 2,6,6-pentamethyl-piperidin-4-yl) -ester, dibenzyl-malonic acid-di- (1,2,3,6-tetramethyl-2,6-diethyl-piperidin-4-yl) -ester Dimethyl-bis- (2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-oxy) -silane, tris- (1-propyl-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) -phos Fit, tris- (1-propyl-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) -phosphate, N, N'-bis- (2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine-4- Yl) -hexamethylene-1,6-diamine, tetrakis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) 1,2,3,4-butanetetracarboxylate, tetrakis (1,2,2, 6, -Pentamethyl-4-piperidyl) 1,2,3,4-butanetetracarboxylate, N, N'-bis- (2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) -hexamethylene-1, 6-diacetamide, 1-acetyl-4- (N-cyclohexylacetamide) -2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-piperidine, 4-benzylamino-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, N, N'-bis- (2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) -N, N'-dibutyl-adipamide, N, N'-bis- (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl Piperidin-4-yl) -N, N'-dicyclohexyl- (2-hydroxypropylene), N, N'-bis- (2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) -p-xylylene- Zia 4- (bis-2-hydroxyethyl) -amino-1,2,2,6,6-pentamethylpiperidine, 4-methacrylamide-1,2,2,6,6-pentamethylpiperidine, α- And cyano-β-methyl-β- [N- (2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)]-amino-acrylic acid methyl ester.
 さらに、N,N′,N″,N′″-テトラキス-[4,6-ビス-〔ブチル-(N-メチル-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-4-イル)アミノ〕-トリアジン-2-イル]-4,7-ジアザデカン-1,10-ジアミン、ジブチルアミンと1,3,5-トリアジン・N,N′-ビス(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)-1,6-ヘキサメチレンジアミンとN-(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)ブチルアミンとの重縮合物(BASF社製 CHIMASSORB 2020FDL)、ジブチルアミンと1,3,5-トリアジンとN,N′-ビス(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)ブチルアミンとの重縮合物、ポリ〔{(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)アミノ-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4-ジイル}{(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)イミノ}ヘキサメチレン{(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)イミノ}〕(BASF社製 CHIMASSORB 944FDL)、1,6-ヘキサンジアミン-N,N′-ビス(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)とモルフォリン-2,4,6-トリクロロ-1,3,5-トリアジンとの重縮合物、ポリ[(6-モルフォリノ-s-トリアジン-2,4-ジイル)〔(2,2,6,6,-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)イミノ〕-ヘキサメチレン〔(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)イミノ〕]などの、ピペリジン環がトリアジン骨格を介して複数結合した高分子量HALS(hindered amine light stabilizer);コハク酸ジメチルと4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-1-ピペリジンエタノールとの重合物、1,2,3,4-ブタンテトラカルボン酸と1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジノールと3,9-ビス(2-ヒドロキシ-1,1-ジメチルエチル)-2,4,8,10-テトラオキサスピロ[5,5]ウンデカンとの混合エステル化物などの、ピペリジン環がエステル結合を介して結合した高分子量HALSなどが挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。これらの中でも、ジブチルアミンと1,3,5-トリアジンとN,N′-ビス(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)ブチルアミンとの重縮合物、ポリ〔{(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)アミノ-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4-ジイル}{(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)イミノ}ヘキサメチレン{(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)イミノ}〕、コハク酸ジメチルと4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-1-ピペリジンエタノールとの重合物などで、数平均分子量(Mn)が2,000~5,000のものが好ましい。 Further, N, N ′, N ″, N ′ ″-tetrakis- [4,6-bis- [butyl- (N-methyl-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl) amino]- Triazin-2-yl] -4,7-diazadecane-1,10-diamine, dibutylamine and 1,3,5-triazine N, N'-bis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4- Piperidyl) -1,6-hexamethylenediamine and N- (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) butylamine polycondensate (BASF's CHIMASSORB-2020FDL), dibutylamine and 1,3,3 Polycondensate of 5-triazine and N, N'-bis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) butylamine, poly [{(1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) amino -1,3 , 5-triazine-2,4-diyl} {(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) imino} hexamethylene {(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) imino }] (CHIMASSORB 944FDL manufactured by BASF), 1,6-hexanediamine-N, N′-bis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) and morpholine-2,4,6-trichloro Polycondensate with 1,3,5-triazine, poly [(6-morpholino-s-triazine-2,4-diyl) [(2,2,6,6, -tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) imino ] -Hexamethylene [(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) imino]] and other high molecular weight HALS (hindered inderamine light) in which a plurality of piperidine rings are bonded via a triazine skeleton. stabilizer); a polymer of dimethyl succinate and 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-1-piperidineethanol, 1,2,3,4-butanetetracarboxylic acid and 1,2,2, Mixed esterified product of 6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidinol and 3,9-bis (2-hydroxy-1,1-dimethylethyl) -2,4,8,10-tetraoxaspiro [5,5] undecane Examples include, but are not limited to, high molecular weight HALS in which a piperidine ring is bonded via an ester bond. Among these, polycondensates of dibutylamine, 1,3,5-triazine and N, N′-bis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) butylamine, poly [{(1, 1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) amino-1,3,5-triazine-2,4-diyl} {(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) imino} hexamethylene {(2 , 2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) imino}], a polymer of dimethyl succinate and 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-1-piperidineethanol, etc. A molecular weight (Mn) of 2,000 to 5,000 is preferred.
 好ましいヒンダードアミン系化合物の例には、以下の具体例1(Sunlizer HA-622、株式会社ソート製)、及び具体例2が挙げられる。 Examples of preferable hindered amine compounds include the following Specific Example 1 (Sunlizer HA-622, manufactured by Sort Co., Ltd.) and Specific Example 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 上記具体例の中でも、BASF社(旧チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ株式会社)製CHIMASSORB 2020FDL(CAS-No.192268-64-7)、CHIMASSORB 944FDL(CAS-No.71878-19-8)、及びTINUVIN 770DF(CAS-No.52829-07-9)、サンケミカル株式会社製サイアソーブUV-3346(CAS-No.82541-48-7)、同サイアソーブUV-3529(CAS-No.193098-40-7)は市販されており、入手性に優れるので好適である。 Among the above specific examples, CHIMASSORB 2020FDL (CAS-No. 192268-64-7), CHIMASSORB 944FDL (CAS-No. 71878-19-8), and TINUVIN 770DF manufactured by BASF (former Ciba Specialty Chemicals) (CAS-No. 52829-07-9), Siasorb UV-3346 (CAS-No. 82541-48-7) and Siasorb UV-3529 (CAS-No. 193098-40-7) manufactured by Sun Chemical Co., Ltd. It is suitable because it is commercially available and has excellent availability.
 なお、上記のヒンダードアミン系化合物は、上述のように商業的に入手してもよいが、合成により製造したものを用いてもよい。ヒンダードアミン系化合物の合成方法としては特に制限はなく、通常の有機合成における手法により合成可能である。また、生成方法としては、蒸留、再結晶、再沈、ろ過剤・吸着剤を用いる方法を適宜使用することができる。さらに、通常市販される安価に入手可能なものはヒンダードアミン系化合物単独ではなく、混合物であることもあるが、本実施形態では、商業的に入手したものを、製造方法、組成、融点、酸価等によらず利用することができる。 In addition, although the above-mentioned hindered amine compound may be obtained commercially as described above, a synthetically produced compound may be used. There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a synthesis | combining method of a hindered amine type compound, It can synthesize | combine by the method in normal organic synthesis. Moreover, as a production | generation method, the method using distillation, recrystallization, reprecipitation, and a filter agent and adsorption agent can be used suitably. Furthermore, the commercially available products that are available on the market at low cost may be a mixture instead of the hindered amine compound alone, but in the present embodiment, the commercially available product is obtained by the production method, composition, melting point, acid value. It can be used regardless of the above.
 フィルム基材に用いられるヒンダードアミン系化合物は、低分子量のものであっても、繰り返し単位を有するポリマーであってもよいが、活性エネルギー線硬化層とフィルム基材との界面近傍にヒンダードアミン系化合物を偏在させるためには高分子量の方が好ましい。一方、分子量が高すぎるとフィルム基材(例えばセルロースアシレート)との相溶性が不足し、フィルムのヘイズが高くなってしまう。 The hindered amine compound used for the film substrate may be a low molecular weight polymer or a polymer having a repeating unit, but a hindered amine compound is provided in the vicinity of the interface between the active energy ray cured layer and the film substrate. A high molecular weight is preferable for uneven distribution. On the other hand, if the molecular weight is too high, the compatibility with the film substrate (for example, cellulose acylate) is insufficient, and the haze of the film is increased.
 ヒンダードアミン系化合物は、分子量が300~100000であることが好ましく、700~50000であることがより好ましく、2000~30000であることが特に好ましい。 The molecular weight of the hindered amine compound is preferably 300 to 100,000, more preferably 700 to 50,000, and particularly preferably 2,000 to 30,000.
 フィルム基材に対するヒンダードアミン系化合物の含有量は、0.001質量%以上5質量%以下であることが望ましく、0.001質量%以上2質量%以下であることがより望ましく、0.01質量%以上1.5質量%以下であることがさらに望ましく、0.05質量%以上1.0質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。 The content of the hindered amine compound with respect to the film substrate is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 2% by mass, and 0.01% by mass. The content is more preferably 1.5% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0.05% by mass or more and 1.0% by mass or less.
 ヒンダードアミン系化合物の含有量がフィルム基材に対して0.001質量%未満の場合には、硬化層とフィルム基材との間の密着が十分確保できない。ヒンダードアミン系化合物の含有量が5質量%以下の場合には、ヒンダードアミン系化合物のブリードアウトが生じにくくなり、偏光板の偏光性能の改善の観点から好ましい。 When the content of the hindered amine compound is less than 0.001% by mass with respect to the film substrate, sufficient adhesion between the cured layer and the film substrate cannot be ensured. When the content of the hindered amine compound is 5% by mass or less, the hindered amine compound is less likely to bleed out, which is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the polarization performance of the polarizing plate.
 (一般式(P)で表されるモノマーに由来する繰り返し単位を含む重合体)
 フィルム基材がセルロースエステルフィルムである場合、フィルム基材は、下記一般式(P)で表されるモノマーに由来する繰り返し単位を含む重合体を含有することが、本実施形態の効果から好ましい。
(Polymer containing repeating units derived from the monomer represented by formula (P))
When a film base material is a cellulose-ester film, it is preferable from the effect of this embodiment that a film base material contains the polymer containing the repeating unit derived from the monomer represented by the following general formula (P).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 一般式(P)中、R1は水素原子または炭素数1~4の脂肪族基を表す。R1は、特に限定されないが、水素原子、メチル基、又はエチル基であることが好ましい。 In general formula (P), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. R 1 is not particularly limited, but is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
 R2は置換基を表し、置換基としては、脂肪族基又は芳香族基が好ましい。R2は、特に限定されないが、脂肪族基としては、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、シクロアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基が更に好ましく、メチル基、t-ブチル基が特に好ましい。芳香族基としては、フェニル基、ナフチル基、ビフェニル基が好ましく、フェニル基が特に好ましい。 R 2 represents a substituent, and the substituent is preferably an aliphatic group or an aromatic group. R 2 is not particularly limited, but the aliphatic group is preferably an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group or a cycloalkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group. A butyl group is more preferable, and a methyl group and a t-butyl group are particularly preferable. As the aromatic group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a biphenyl group are preferable, and a phenyl group is particularly preferable.
 nは0~4の整数を表し、0~2が好ましく、0~1がより好ましい。なお、nが0のとき置換基R2が存在しないことになるが、化学式中、ここには水素原子があればよいことを意味する。 n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 to 2, and more preferably 0 to 1. Note that when n is 0, the substituent R 2 does not exist, but in the chemical formula, this means that a hydrogen atom is sufficient.
 (A)は5または6員環を形成するのに必要な原子群を表し、5または6員の芳香環であることが好ましい。本明細書の芳香環とは、ヘテロ原子を含まない芳香族環とヘテロ原子を有する飽和・不飽和の複素環を含む概念である。 (A) represents an atomic group necessary for forming a 5- or 6-membered ring, and is preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic ring. The aromatic ring in this specification is a concept including an aromatic ring containing no hetero atom and a saturated / unsaturated hetero ring containing a hetero atom.
 フィルムの透湿度および含水率を抑制する効果から、一般式(P)で表わされる重合体の質量平均分子量は200~10,000であることが好ましく、300~8,000であることがより好ましく、400~4,000であることが特に好ましい。フィルムの透湿度および含水率を抑制する効果から、上限値以下であると、セルロースアシレートとの相溶性向上が期待できる。 In view of the effect of suppressing the moisture permeability and moisture content of the film, the mass average molecular weight of the polymer represented by the general formula (P) is preferably 200 to 10,000, and more preferably 300 to 8,000. 400 to 4,000 is particularly preferable. From the effect of suppressing the moisture permeability and moisture content of the film, an improvement in compatibility with the cellulose acylate can be expected when it is not more than the upper limit.
 分子量及び分散度は、特に断らない限り、GPC(ゲルろ過クロマトグラフィー)法を用いて測定した値とし、分子量はポリスチレン換算の質量平均分子量で測定できる。 Unless otherwise specified, the molecular weight and dispersity are values measured using a GPC (gel filtration chromatography) method, and the molecular weight can be measured by a polystyrene-reduced mass average molecular weight.
 一般式(P)で表わされる重合体の添加量は特に限定されないが、フィルム基材を形成する樹脂100質量部に対して、0.1~100質量部であることが好ましく、0.5~50質量部であることがより好ましく、1.0~30質量部であることが特に好ましい。 The addition amount of the polymer represented by the general formula (P) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin forming the film substrate, and 0.5 to The amount is more preferably 50 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 30 parts by mass.
 以下、一般式(P)で表されるモノマー由来の繰り返し単位を有する重合体の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定して解釈されるものではない。なお、下記の構造式は主要成分の繰り返し単位の化学構造とその構成比を示しており、その他の成分が含まれていてもよいことは上記の通りである。 Hereinafter, although the specific example of the polymer which has a repeating unit derived from the monomer represented by general formula (P) is shown, this invention is limited to this and is not interpreted. In addition, the following structural formula has shown the chemical structure of the repeating unit of the main component, and its structural ratio, and it is as above-mentioned that the other component may be contained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 なお、本明細書の重合体とは、モノマーが多数重合した一般的な高分子化合物であるポリマーに加えて、モノマーが例えば数個重合した分子量数百程度の化合物であるオリゴマーも含まれることを意味する。また特に断らない限り、ポリマー、コポリマーまたは共重合体も含む。 The polymer of the present specification includes not only a polymer that is a general polymer compound in which a large number of monomers are polymerized, but also an oligomer that is a compound having a molecular weight of about several hundreds, in which several monomers are polymerized, for example. means. Unless otherwise specified, polymers, copolymers or copolymers are also included.
 (有機酸)
 フィルム基材がセルロースエステルフィルムである場合、フィルム基材は、有機酸を含有することが、本実施形態の効果から好ましい。有機酸の分子量は200~1000であることが好ましく、250~800であることがより好ましく、280~500であることが特に好ましい。有機酸としては、芳香環構造を含むことが好ましく、炭素数6~12のアリール基を含むことが好ましく、フェニル基を含むことが特に好ましい。有機酸の芳香環構造は、その他の環と縮合環を形成していてもよい。有機酸の芳香環構造は、置換基を有していてもよいが、ハロゲン原子またはアルキル基であることが好ましく、ハロゲン原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、塩素原子またはメチル基であることが特に好ましい。有機酸は、下記一般式(Q)で表されることが、本実施形態の効果から好ましい。
(Organic acid)
When a film base material is a cellulose-ester film, it is preferable from the effect of this embodiment that a film base material contains an organic acid. The molecular weight of the organic acid is preferably 200 to 1000, more preferably 250 to 800, and particularly preferably 280 to 500. The organic acid preferably includes an aromatic ring structure, preferably includes an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably includes a phenyl group. The aromatic ring structure of the organic acid may form a condensed ring with other rings. The aromatic ring structure of the organic acid may have a substituent, but is preferably a halogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a halogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a chlorine atom. Or it is especially preferable that it is a methyl group. The organic acid is preferably represented by the following general formula (Q) from the effect of this embodiment.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 一般式(Q)において、R26はアリール基を表し、R27およびR28はそれぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基を表す。R26およびR27はそれぞれ置換基を有していてもよい。R26は炭素数6~18のアリール基であることが好ましく、炭素数6~12のアリール基であることがより好ましく、フェニル基であることが特に好ましい。R27およびR28はそれぞれ独立して水素原子、炭素数1~12のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)または炭素数6~12のアリール基であることが好ましく、水素原子、炭素数1~6のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基も含む)またはフェニル基であることがより好ましく、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、シクロヘキサン基またはフェニル基であることが特に好ましい。以下に一般式(Q)で表される有機酸の具体例を例示するが、本発明は以下に限定されるものではない。 In the general formula (Q), R 26 represents an aryl group, and R 27 and R 28 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. R 26 and R 27 may each have a substituent. R 26 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a phenyl group. R 27 and R 28 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (including a cycloalkyl group) or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. It is more preferably an alkyl group of 6 (including a cycloalkyl group) or a phenyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a cyclohexane group or a phenyl group. Specific examples of the organic acid represented by the general formula (Q) are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited to the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 有機酸の含有量としては、セルロースエステルに対して1~20質量%であることが好ましい。 The content of the organic acid is preferably 1 to 20% by mass with respect to the cellulose ester.
 (一般式(S)で表される化合物)
 フィルム基材がセルロースエステルフィルムである場合、フィルム基材は、以下の一般式(S)で表される化合物を含有することが、本実施形態の効果から好ましい。
(Compound represented by formula (S))
When a film base material is a cellulose-ester film, it is preferable from the effect of this embodiment that a film base material contains the compound represented by the following general formula (S).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 一般式(S)において、R1は水素原子又は置換基を表し、R2は下記一般式(a)で表される置換基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表す。n1が2以上のとき、複数のR1は互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。n2は1~5の整数を表す。n2が2以上のとき、複数のR2は互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (S), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 2 represents a substituent represented by the following general formula (a). n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n1 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 1 may be the same as or different from each other. n2 represents an integer of 1 to 5. When n2 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 2 may be the same as or different from each other.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 一般式(a)において、Aは置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表す。R3及びR4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基又は下記の一般式(b)で表される置換基を表す。R5は、単結合又は炭素原子数1~5のアルキレン基を表す。Xは、置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表す。n3は0~10の整数を表す。n3が2以上のとき、複数のR5及びXは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 In general formula (a), A represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring. R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a substituent represented by the following general formula (b). R 5 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring. n3 represents an integer of 0 to 10. When n3 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 5 and X may be the same as or different from each other.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 一般式(b)において、Xは、置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表す。R6、R7、R8、及びR9は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又は炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基を表す。n5は1~11の整数を表す。n5が2以上のとき、複数のR6、R7、R8及びXは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 In general formula (b), X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring. R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and R 9 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. n5 represents an integer of 1 to 11. When n5 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and X may be the same as or different from each other.
 以下、一般式(S)で表される化合物の具体例を示すが、化合物はこれらに限定されるわけではない。 Hereinafter, specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (S) are shown, but the compound is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
 一般式(S)で表される化合物の重量平均分子量は200~1200であることが溶解から好ましく、250~1000であることがより好ましく、300~800であることが特に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the compound represented by the general formula (S) is preferably from 200 to 1,200, more preferably from 250 to 1,000, and particularly preferably from 300 to 800.
 一般式(S)で表される化合物の添加量は特に限定されないが、フィルム基材100質量部に対して、0.1~100質量部であることが安定性から好ましく、0.2~80質量部であることがより好ましく、0.3~60質量部であることが特に好ましい。 The addition amount of the compound represented by the general formula (S) is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 0.1 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the film base material, and is preferably from 0.2 to 80 The amount is more preferably part by mass, and particularly preferably 0.3 to 60 parts by mass.
 (欠点)
 フィルム基材は、直径5μm以上の欠点が1個/10cm四方以下であることが好ましい。更に好ましくは0.5個/10cm四方以下、一層好ましくは0.1個/10cm四方以下である。ここで欠点の直径とは、欠点が円形の場合はその直径を示し、円形でない場合は欠点の範囲を下記方法により顕微鏡で観察して決定し、その最大径(外接円の直径)とする。
(Disadvantage)
The film substrate preferably has a defect of 5 μm or more in diameter of 1 piece / 10 cm square or less. More preferably, it is 0.5 piece / 10 cm square or less, more preferably 0.1 piece / 10 cm square or less. Here, the diameter of the defect indicates the diameter when the defect is circular, and when the defect is not circular, the range of the defect is determined by observing with a microscope by the following method, and the maximum diameter (diameter of circumscribed circle) is determined.
 欠点の範囲は、欠点が気泡や異物の場合は、欠点を微分干渉顕微鏡の透過光で観察したときの影の大きさである。欠点が、ローラ傷の転写や擦り傷など、表面形状の変化の場合は、欠点を微分干渉顕微鏡の反射光で観察して大きさを確認できる。 The range of the defect is the size of the shadow when the defect is observed with the transmitted light of the differential interference microscope when the defect is a bubble or a foreign object. When the defect is a change in the surface shape such as transfer of a roller scratch or an abrasion, the size can be confirmed by observing the defect with the reflected light of a differential interference microscope.
 欠点の個数が1個/10cm四方より多いと、例えば後工程での加工時などでフィルムに張力がかかると、欠点を基点としてフィルムが破断して生産性が低下する場合がある。また、欠点の直径が5μm以上になると、偏光板観察などにより目視で確認でき、光学部材として用いたとき輝点が生じる場合がある。 When the number of defects is more than 1/10 cm square, for example, when a tension is applied to the film during processing in a later process, the film may be broken with the defect as a starting point and productivity may be reduced. Moreover, when the diameter of a defect becomes 5 micrometers or more, it can confirm visually by polarizing plate observation etc., and when used as an optical member, a bright spot may arise.
 また、目視で確認できない場合でも、硬化層を形成したときに、塗膜が均一に形成できず欠点(塗布抜け)となる場合がある。ここで、欠点とは、溶液製膜の乾燥工程において溶媒の急激な蒸発に起因して発生するフィルム中の空洞(発泡欠点)や、製膜原液中の異物や製膜中に混入する異物に起因するフィルム中の異物(異物欠点)を言う。また、フィルム基材は、JIS-K7127-1999に準拠した測定において、少なくとも一方向の破断伸度が、10%以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは20%以上である。破断伸度の上限は特に限定されるものではないが、現実的には250%程度である。破断伸度を大きくするには異物や発泡に起因するフィルム中の欠点を抑制することが有効である。 Moreover, even when it cannot be visually confirmed, when the cured layer is formed, the coating film may not be formed uniformly, resulting in a defect (missing coating). Here, the defect is a void in the film (foaming defect) generated due to the rapid evaporation of the solvent in the drying process of the solution casting, a foreign matter in the film forming stock solution, or a foreign matter mixed in the film forming. This refers to the foreign matter (foreign matter defect) in the film. Further, the film base material preferably has a breaking elongation of at least one direction of 10% or more, more preferably 20% or more in the measurement based on JIS-K7127-1999. The upper limit of the elongation at break is not particularly limited, but is practically about 250%. In order to increase the elongation at break, it is effective to suppress defects in the film caused by foreign matter and foaming.
 (光学特性)
 フィルム基材は、その全光線透過率が90%以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは92%以上である。また、現実的な上限としては、99%程度である。ヘイズ値は2%以下が好ましく、より好ましくは1.5%以下である。全光線透過率、ヘイズ値はJIS K7361及びJIS K7136に準じて測定することができる。
(optical properties)
The film substrate preferably has a total light transmittance of 90% or more, more preferably 92% or more. Moreover, as a realistic upper limit, it is about 99%. The haze value is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 1.5% or less. The total light transmittance and haze value can be measured according to JIS K7361 and JIS K7136.
 また、フィルム基材の面内リタデーション値Roは0~5nm、厚さ方向のリタデーション値Rthが-10~10nmの範囲が好ましい。更にRthは-5~5nmの範囲が好ましくい。或いはレターデーションRoが30~200nmの範囲であることが好ましく、30~90nmの範囲であることが更に好ましい。厚み方向のレターデーションRthは70~300nmの範囲であることが好ましい。 The in-plane retardation value Ro of the film base is preferably 0 to 5 nm, and the retardation value Rth in the thickness direction is preferably in the range of −10 to 10 nm. Further, Rth is preferably in the range of -5 to 5 nm. Alternatively, the retardation Ro is preferably in the range of 30 to 200 nm, and more preferably in the range of 30 to 90 nm. The retardation Rth in the thickness direction is preferably in the range of 70 to 300 nm.
 面内リタデーションRo値は下記式(I)に定義され、厚さ方向のリタデーション値Rthは下記式(II)により定義される。
 式(I) Ro=(nx-ny)×d
 式(II) Rth={(nx+ny)/2-nz}×d
(式中、nxはフィルム基材の面内の遅相軸方向の屈折率、nyはフィルム基材面内で遅相軸に直交する方向の屈折率、nzはフィルム基材の厚さ方向の屈折率、dはフィルム基材の厚さ(nm)をそれぞれ表す。)
The in-plane retardation Ro value is defined by the following formula (I), and the retardation value Rth in the thickness direction is defined by the following formula (II).
Formula (I) Ro = (nx−ny) × d
Formula (II) Rth = {(nx + ny) / 2−nz} × d
(Where nx is the refractive index in the slow axis direction in the plane of the film base, ny is the refractive index in the direction perpendicular to the slow axis in the plane of the film base, and nz is the thickness direction of the film base) (Refractive index, d represents the thickness (nm) of the film substrate, respectively)
 上記リタデーションは、例えばKOBRA-21ADH(王子計測機器(株)製)を用いて、23℃、55%RH(相対湿度)の環境下で、波長が590nmで求めることができる。 The retardation can be obtained at a wavelength of 590 nm under an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH (relative humidity) using, for example, KOBRA-21ADH (manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments).
 〔フィルムの製膜〕
 次に、フィルム基材の製膜方法として、セルロースエステルフィルムを例に挙げて説明するが、製膜方法はこれに限定されるものではない。セルロースエステルフィルムの製膜方法としては、インフレーション法、T-ダイ法、カレンダー法、切削法、流延法、エマルジョン法、ホットプレス法等の製造法が使用できる。
[Film formation]
Next, as a film forming method of the film substrate, a cellulose ester film will be described as an example, but the film forming method is not limited thereto. As a method for producing a cellulose ester film, a production method such as an inflation method, a T-die method, a calendar method, a cutting method, a casting method, an emulsion method, a hot press method, or the like can be used.
 (有機溶媒)
 セルロースエステルフィルムを後述する溶液流延製膜法で製造する場合の樹脂溶液(ドープ組成物)を形成するのに有用な有機溶媒は、セルロースエステル樹脂、その他の添加剤を同時に溶解するものであれば制限なく用いることができる。例えば、塩素系有機溶媒としては、塩化メチレン、非塩素系有機溶媒としては、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸アミル、アセトン、テトラヒドロフラン、1,3-ジオキソラン、1,4-ジオキサン、シクロヘキサノン、ギ酸エチル、2,2,2-トリフルオロエタノール、2,2,3,3-ヘキサフルオロ-1-プロパノール、1,3-ジフルオロ-2-プロパノール、1,1,1,3,3,3-ヘキサフルオロ-2-メチル-2-プロパノール、1,1,1,3,3,3-ヘキサフルオロ-2-プロパノール、2,2,3,3,3-ペンタフルオロ-1-プロパノール、ニトロエタン、メタノール、エタノール、n-プロパノール、iso-プロパノール、n-ブタノール、sec-ブタノール、tert-ブタノール等を挙げることができ、塩化メチレン、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、アセトンを好ましく使用し得る。前記溶媒はセルロースエステル樹脂、その他添加剤を計15~45質量%溶解させたドープ組成物であることが好ましい。
(Organic solvent)
An organic solvent useful for forming a resin solution (dope composition) in the case of producing a cellulose ester film by a solution casting film forming method described later is one that can simultaneously dissolve a cellulose ester resin and other additives. Can be used without limitation. For example, as a chlorinated organic solvent, methylene chloride, as a non-chlorinated organic solvent, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, amyl acetate, acetone, tetrahydrofuran, 1,3-dioxolane, 1,4-dioxane, cyclohexanone, ethyl formate, 2,2,2-trifluoroethanol, 2,2,3,3-hexafluoro-1-propanol, 1,3-difluoro-2-propanol, 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro- 2-methyl-2-propanol, 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-propanol, 2,2,3,3,3-pentafluoro-1-propanol, nitroethane, methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, iso-propanol, n-butanol, sec-butanol, tert-butanol, etc. Can, methylene chloride, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, may be used preferably acetone. The solvent is preferably a dope composition in which a total of 15 to 45 mass% of cellulose ester resin and other additives are dissolved.
 (溶液流延製膜法)
 溶液流延製膜法では、樹脂及び添加剤を溶剤に溶解させてドープを調製する工程、ドープをベルト状もしくはドラム状の金属支持体上に流延する工程、流延したドープをウェブとして乾燥する工程、金属支持体から剥離する工程、延伸又は幅保持する工程、更に乾燥する工程、仕上がったセルロースエステルフィルムを巻き取る工程により行われる。
(Solution casting film forming method)
In the solution casting film forming method, a step of preparing a dope by dissolving a resin and an additive in a solvent, a step of casting the dope on a belt-shaped or drum-shaped metal support, and drying the cast dope as a web It is carried out by a step of peeling off from the metal support, a step of stretching or maintaining the width, a step of further drying, and a step of winding up the finished cellulose ester film.
 金属支持体としては、ステンレススティールベルト若しくは鋳物で表面をメッキ仕上げしたドラムが好ましく用いられる。 As the metal support, a stainless steel belt or a drum whose surface is plated with a casting is preferably used.
 キャスト(流延)の幅は1~4mとすることができる。流延工程の金属支持体の表面温度は-50℃~溶剤が沸騰して発泡しない温度に設定される。温度が高い方がウェブの乾燥速度が速くできるので好ましいが、余り高すぎるとウェブが発泡したり、平面性が劣化する場合がある。 The width of the cast (casting) can be 1 to 4 m. The surface temperature of the metal support in the casting process is set to −50 ° C. to a temperature at which the solvent boils and does not foam. A higher temperature is preferred because the web can be dried faster, but if it is too high, the web may foam or the flatness may deteriorate.
 好ましい支持体温度としては0~100℃で適宜決定され、5~30℃が更に好ましい。又は、冷却することによってウェブをゲル化させて残留溶媒を多く含んだ状態でドラムから剥離することも好ましい方法である。金属支持体の温度を制御する方法は特に制限されないが、温風又は冷風を吹きかける方法や、温水を金属支持体の裏側に接触させる方法がある。温水を用いる方が熱の伝達が効率的に行われるため、金属支持体の温度が一定になるまでの時間が短く好ましい。 A preferable support temperature is appropriately determined at 0 to 100 ° C., and more preferably 5 to 30 ° C. Alternatively, it is also a preferable method that the web is gelled by cooling and peeled from the drum in a state containing a large amount of residual solvent. The method for controlling the temperature of the metal support is not particularly limited, and there are a method of blowing warm air or cold air, and a method of contacting hot water with the back side of the metal support. It is preferable to use warm water because heat transfer is performed efficiently, so that the time until the temperature of the metal support becomes constant is short.
 温風を用いる場合は溶媒の蒸発潜熱によるウェブの温度低下を考慮して、溶媒の沸点以上の温風を使用しつつ、発泡も防ぎながら目的の温度よりも高い温度の風を使う場合がある。 When using warm air, considering the temperature drop of the web due to the latent heat of vaporization of the solvent, while using warm air above the boiling point of the solvent, there may be cases where wind at a temperature higher than the target temperature is used while preventing foaming. .
 特に、流延から剥離するまでの間で支持体の温度及び乾燥風の温度を変更し、効率的に乾燥を行うことが好ましい。 In particular, it is preferable to efficiently dry by changing the temperature of the support and the temperature of the drying air during the period from casting to peeling.
 セルロースエステルフィルムが良好な平面性を得るためには、金属支持体からウェブを剥離する際の残留溶媒量が10~150質量%であることが好ましく、更に好ましくは20~40質量%又は60~130質量%であり、特に好ましくは、20~30質量%又は70~120質量%である。残留溶媒量は下記式で定義される。
  残留溶媒量(質量%)={(M-N)/N}×100
 なお、Mはウェブ又はフィルムを製造中又は製造後の任意の時点で採取した試料の質量で、Nは質量Mのものを115℃で1時間の加熱後の質量である。
In order for the cellulose ester film to obtain good flatness, the residual solvent amount when peeling the web from the metal support is preferably 10 to 150% by mass, more preferably 20 to 40% by mass or 60 to 60%. It is 130% by mass, particularly preferably 20 to 30% by mass or 70 to 120% by mass. The amount of residual solvent is defined by the following formula.
Residual solvent amount (% by mass) = {(MN) / N} × 100
In addition, M is the mass of the sample collected at any time during or after the production of the web or film, and N is the mass after heating at 115 ° C. for 1 hour.
 セルロースエステルフィルムの乾燥工程では、ウェブを金属支持体より剥離し、乾燥し、残留溶媒量を1質量%以下にすることが好ましく、更に好ましくは0.1質量%以下であり、特に好ましくは0~0.01質量%以下である。 In the drying step of the cellulose ester film, the web is peeled off from the metal support and dried to make the residual solvent amount 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0. -0.01 mass% or less.
 フィルム乾燥工程では、一般にローラ乾燥方式(上下に配置した多数のローラにウェブを交互に通し乾燥させる方式)やテンター方式でウェブを搬送させながら乾燥する方式が採られる。 In the film drying process, generally, a roller drying method (a method in which webs are alternately passed through a plurality of rollers arranged above and below) and a method in which the web is dried while being conveyed by a tenter method are employed.
 延伸工程では、フィルムの長手方向(MD方向)、及び幅手方向(TD方向)に対して、逐次又は同時に延伸することができる。互いに直交する2軸方向の延伸倍率は、それぞれ最終的にはMD方向に1.0~2.0倍、TD方向に1.05~2.0倍の範囲とすることが好ましく、MD方向に1.0~1.5倍、TD方向に1.05~2.0倍の範囲で行うことがさらに好ましい。例えば、複数のローラに周速差をつけ、その間でローラ周速差を利用してMD方向に延伸する方法、ウェブの両端をクリップやピンで固定し、クリップやピンの間隔を進行方向に広げてMD方向に延伸する方法、同様に横方向に広げてTD方向に延伸する方法、或いはMD方向及びTD方向を同時に広げて両方向に延伸する方法等が挙げられる。 In the stretching step, the film can be sequentially or simultaneously stretched in the longitudinal direction (MD direction) and the lateral direction (TD direction). The draw ratios in the biaxial directions perpendicular to each other are preferably in the range of 1.0 to 2.0 times in the MD direction and 1.05 to 2.0 times in the TD direction, respectively. More preferably, it is carried out in the range of 1.0 to 1.5 times and 1.05 to 2.0 times in the TD direction. For example, a method of making a difference in peripheral speed between a plurality of rollers and stretching in the MD direction using the difference in peripheral speed of the roller between them, fixing both ends of the web with clips and pins, and widening the interval between the clips and pins in the traveling direction And a method of stretching in the MD direction, a method of stretching in the lateral direction and stretching in the TD direction, a method of stretching the MD direction and the TD direction simultaneously, and stretching in both directions.
 製膜工程のこれらの幅保持或いは幅手方向の延伸はテンターによって行うことが好ましく、ピンテンターでもクリップテンターでもよい。 It is preferable to perform the width maintenance or the stretching in the width direction in the film forming process by a tenter, and it may be a pin tenter or a clip tenter.
 テンター等の製膜工程でのフィルム搬送張力は、温度にもよるが、120~200N/mが好ましく、140~200N/mが更に好ましく、140~160N/mが最も好ましい。 The film transport tension in the film forming process such as a tenter is preferably 120 to 200 N / m, more preferably 140 to 200 N / m, and most preferably 140 to 160 N / m, although it depends on the temperature.
 延伸する際の温度は、セルロースエステルフィルムのガラス転移温度をTgとすると(Tg-30)~(Tg+100)℃、より好ましくは(Tg-20)~(Tg+80)℃、更に好ましく(Tg-5)~(Tg+20)℃である。 The stretching temperature is (Tg-30) to (Tg + 100) ° C., more preferably (Tg-20) to (Tg + 80) ° C., more preferably (Tg-5), where Tg is the glass transition temperature of the cellulose ester film. ~ (Tg + 20) ° C.
 セルロースエステルフィルムのTgは、フィルムを構成する材料種及び構成する材料の比率によって制御することができる。セルロースエステルフィルムの乾燥時のTgは、110℃以上が好ましく、更に120℃以上が好ましい。特に好ましくは150℃以上である。ガラス転移温度は190℃以下、より好ましくは170℃以下であることが好ましい。セルロースエステルフィルムのTgはJIS K7121に記載の方法等によって求めることができる。延伸する際の温度は、150℃以上、延伸倍率は1.15倍以上にすると、表面が適度に粗れるため、好ましい。セルロースエステルフィルム表面を粗らすことにより、滑り性が向上するとともに、表面加工性が向上するため好ましい。 The Tg of the cellulose ester film can be controlled by the material type constituting the film and the ratio of the constituting materials. The Tg when the cellulose ester film is dried is preferably 110 ° C. or higher, more preferably 120 ° C. or higher. Especially preferably, it is 150 degreeC or more. The glass transition temperature is preferably 190 ° C. or lower, more preferably 170 ° C. or lower. The Tg of the cellulose ester film can be determined by the method described in JIS K7121. The stretching temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or more and the stretching ratio is 1.15 times or more because the surface is appropriately roughened. Roughening the surface of the cellulose ester film is preferable because it improves slipperiness and improves surface processability.
 (溶融流延製膜法)
 フィルム基材は、溶融流延製膜法によって製膜しても良い。溶融流延製膜法は、セルロースエステル樹脂、可塑剤等のその他の添加剤を含む組成物を、流動性を示す温度まで加熱溶融し、その後、流動性のセルロースエステルを含む溶融物を流延することをいう。
(Melt casting method)
The film substrate may be formed by a melt casting film forming method. In the melt casting film forming method, a composition containing other additives such as a cellulose ester resin and a plasticizer is heated and melted to a temperature showing fluidity, and then a melt containing the fluid cellulose ester is cast. To do.
 溶融流延製膜法では、機械的強度及び表面精度等の点から、溶融押出し法が好ましい。溶融押出しに用いる複数の原材料は、通常予め混錬してペレット化しておくことが好ましい。 In the melt casting film forming method, the melt extrusion method is preferable from the viewpoint of mechanical strength and surface accuracy. It is preferable that a plurality of raw materials used for melt extrusion are usually kneaded in advance and pelletized.
 ペレット化は、公知の方法でよく、例えば、乾燥セルロースエステルや可塑剤、その他添加剤をフィーダーで押出し機に供給して1軸や2軸の押出し機を用いて混錬し、ダイからストランド状に押出し、水冷又は空冷し、カッティングすることでできる。 Pelletization may be performed by a known method, for example, dry cellulose ester, plasticizer, and other additives are fed to an extruder with a feeder, kneaded using a single or twin screw extruder, and formed into a strand from a die. Can be extruded, water-cooled or air-cooled, and then cut.
 添加剤は、押出し機に供給する前に混合しておいてもよいし、それぞれ個別のフィーダーで供給してもよい。 Additives may be mixed before being supplied to the extruder, or may be supplied by individual feeders.
 粒子や酸化防止剤等の少量の添加剤は、均一に混合するため、事前に混合しておくことが好ましい。 A small amount of additives such as particles and antioxidants are preferably mixed in advance in order to mix uniformly.
 押出し機は、剪断力を抑え、樹脂が劣化(分子量低下、着色、ゲル生成等)しないように、ペレット化できる程度になるべく低温で加工することが好ましい。例えば、2軸押出し機の場合、深溝タイプのスクリューを用いて、同方向に回転させることが好ましい。混錬の均一性から、噛み合いタイプが好ましい。 The extruder is preferably processed at a temperature as low as possible so that it can be pelletized so that the shearing force is suppressed and the resin does not deteriorate (molecular weight reduction, coloring, gel formation, etc.). For example, in the case of a twin screw extruder, it is preferable to rotate in the same direction using a deep groove type screw. From the uniformity of kneading, the meshing type is preferable.
 以上のようにして得られたペレットを用いてフィルム製膜を行う。もちろんペレット化せず、原材料の粉末をそのままフィーダーで押出し機に供給し、そのままフィルム製膜することも可能である。 Film formation is performed using the pellets obtained as described above. Of course, the raw material powder can be directly fed to the extruder by a feeder without being pelletized to form a film as it is.
 上記ペレットを1軸や2軸タイプの押出し機を用いて、押出す際の溶融温度を200~300℃程度とし、リーフディスクタイプのフィルター等で濾過し異物を除去した後、Tダイからフィルム状に流延し、冷却ローラと弾性タッチローラでフィルムをニップし、冷却ローラ上で固化させることにより、セルロースエステルフィルムを製膜する。 Using a single-screw or twin-screw extruder, the pellets are melted at a temperature of about 200 to 300 ° C, filtered through a leaf disk filter, etc. to remove foreign matter, and then formed into a film from the T die. The cellulose ester film is formed by niping the film with a cooling roller and an elastic touch roller and solidifying the film on the cooling roller.
 供給ホッパーから押出し機へ導入する際は、真空下又は減圧下や不活性ガス雰囲気下にして酸化分解等を防止することが好ましい。 When introducing from the supply hopper to the extruder, it is preferable to prevent oxidative decomposition and the like under vacuum, reduced pressure, or inert gas atmosphere.
 押出し流量は、ギヤポンプを導入する等して安定に調整することが好ましい。また、異物の除去に用いるフィルターには、ステンレス繊維焼結フィルターが好ましく用いられる。ステンレス繊維焼結フィルターは、ステンレス繊維体を複雑に絡み合った状態を作り出した上で圧縮し接触箇所を焼結し一体化したもので、その繊維の太さと圧縮量により密度を変え、濾過精度を調整できる。 The extrusion flow rate is preferably adjusted stably by introducing a gear pump or the like. Further, a stainless fiber sintered filter is preferably used as a filter used for removing foreign substances. The stainless steel fiber sintered filter is a united stainless steel fiber body that is intricately intertwined and compressed, and the contact points are sintered and integrated. The density of the fiber is changed depending on the thickness of the fiber and the amount of compression, and the filtration accuracy is improved. Can be adjusted.
 可塑剤や粒子等の添加剤は、予め樹脂と混合しておいてもよいし、押出し機の途中で練り込んでもよい。均一に添加するために、スタチックミキサー等の混合装置を用いることが好ましい。 Additives such as plasticizers and particles may be mixed with the resin in advance, or may be kneaded in the middle of the extruder. In order to add uniformly, it is preferable to use a mixing apparatus such as a static mixer.
 冷却ローラと弾性タッチローラでセルロースエステルフィルムをニップする際のタッチローラ側のセルロースエステルフィルム温度は、フィルムのTg以上(Tg+110℃)以下にすることが好ましい。このような目的で使用する弾性体表面を有するローラは、公知のローラを使用できる。 The cellulose ester film temperature on the touch roller side when the cellulose ester film is nipped by the cooling roller and the elastic touch roller is preferably Tg or more (Tg + 110 ° C.) or less of the film. A known roller can be used as the roller having an elastic surface used for such a purpose.
 弾性タッチローラは挟圧回転体ともいう。弾性タッチローラとしては、市販されているものを用いることもできる。 The elastic touch roller is also called a pinching rotator. A commercially available elastic touch roller can also be used.
 冷却ローラからセルロースエステルフィルムを剥離する際は、張力を制御してフィルムの変形を防止することが好ましい。 When peeling the cellulose ester film from the cooling roller, it is preferable to control the tension to prevent deformation of the film.
 また、上記のようにして得られたセルロースエステルフィルムは、冷却ローラに接する工程を通過後、前記延伸操作により延伸することが好ましい。 Moreover, it is preferable that the cellulose ester film obtained as described above is stretched by the stretching operation after passing through the step of contacting the cooling roller.
 延伸する方法は、公知のローラ延伸機やテンター等を好ましく用いることができる。延伸温度は、通常フィルムを構成する樹脂のTg~(Tg+60)℃の温度範囲で行われることが好ましい。 As the stretching method, a known roller stretching machine or tenter can be preferably used. The stretching temperature is usually preferably in the temperature range of Tg to (Tg + 60) ° C. of the resin constituting the film.
 巻き取る前に、製品となる幅に端部をスリットして裁ち落とし、巻き中の貼り付きや、すり傷防止のために、ナール加工(エンボッシング加工)を両端に施してもよい。ナール加工の方法は凹凸のパターンを側面に有する金属リングを用いて加熱や加圧をすることにより加工することができる。フィルム両端部のクリップの把持部分は通常、セルロースエステルフィルムが変形しており、製品として使用できないので切除され、再利用される。 Before winding, the end may be slit and trimmed to the width of the product, and knurled (embossed) may be applied to both ends to prevent sticking and scratching during winding. The knurling method can be performed by heating or pressurizing using a metal ring having an uneven pattern on the side surface. The grip portion of the clip at both ends of the film is usually cut out and reused because the cellulose ester film is deformed and cannot be used as a product.
 (斜め延伸フィルムの製造方法)
 λ/4フィルムは、斜め延伸フィルムの製造方法により製造することができる。斜め延伸フィルムの製造方法とは、フィルムの延長方向に対して0°を超え90°未満の角度に遅相軸を有する延伸フィルムを製造する方法である。斜め延伸前の未延伸フィルムとしては、前述したセルロースエステルフィルムを用いることができる。
(Manufacturing method of obliquely stretched film)
The λ / 4 film can be produced by a method for producing an obliquely stretched film. The method for producing an obliquely stretched film is a method for producing a stretched film having a slow axis at an angle of more than 0 ° and less than 90 ° with respect to the extending direction of the film. As the unstretched film before oblique stretching, the cellulose ester film described above can be used.
 ここで、フィルムの延長方向に対する角度とは、フィルム面内における角度である。遅相軸は、通常延伸方向又は延伸方向に直角な方向に発現するので、フィルムの延長方向に対して0°を超え90°未満の角度で延伸を行うことにより、かかる遅相軸を有する延伸フィルムを製造できる。 Here, the angle with respect to the extending direction of the film is an angle in the film plane. Since the slow axis is usually expressed in the stretching direction or a direction perpendicular to the stretching direction, stretching having such a slow axis is performed by stretching at an angle of more than 0 ° and less than 90 ° with respect to the extending direction of the film. A film can be manufactured.
 フィルムの延長方向と遅相軸とがなす角度(配向角θ)は、0°を超え90°未満の範囲で、所望の角度に任意に設定することができるが、より好ましくは10°~80°、更に好ましくは40°~50°である。 The angle between the film extension direction and the slow axis (orientation angle θ) can be arbitrarily set to a desired angle in the range of more than 0 ° and less than 90 °, more preferably 10 ° to 80 °. °, more preferably 40 ° to 50 °.
 (斜め延伸)
 斜め延伸フィルムは、斜め延伸装置(斜め延伸テンター)を用いて作製することができる。斜め延伸テンターとしては、レールパターンを多様に変化させることにより、フィルムの配向角を自在に設定でき、さらに、フィルムの配向軸をフィルム幅手方向に渡って左右均等に高精度に配向させることができ、かつ、高精度でフィルム厚みやリタデーションを制御できる装置を好ましく用いることができる。
(Diagonal stretching)
The obliquely stretched film can be produced using an obliquely stretching apparatus (obliquely stretched tenter). As an obliquely stretched tenter, the orientation angle of the film can be set freely by changing the rail pattern in various ways, and furthermore, the orientation axis of the film can be oriented with high precision evenly on the left and right across the width direction of the film. An apparatus capable of controlling the film thickness and retardation with high accuracy can be preferably used.
 (フィルム基材の物性)
 フィルム基材の膜厚は、5~200μmが好ましく、より好ましくは5~80μmであり、特に好ましくは5~34μmである。薄膜のフィルム基材に本実施形態の硬化層を形成することにより、本実施形態の効果がより発揮されやすい。また、フィルム基材の長さは、500~10000mが好ましく、より好ましくは1000~8000mである。前記長さの範囲とすることで、硬化層等の塗布における加工適正やフィルム基材自体のハンドリング性に優れる。
(Physical properties of film substrate)
The thickness of the film substrate is preferably 5 to 200 μm, more preferably 5 to 80 μm, and particularly preferably 5 to 34 μm. By forming the hardened layer of the present embodiment on a thin film substrate, the effect of the present embodiment is more easily exhibited. The length of the film substrate is preferably 500 to 10000 m, more preferably 1000 to 8000 m. By setting it as the range of the said length, it is excellent in the processability in application | coating, such as a hardened layer, and the handleability of film base itself.
 また、フィルム基材の算術平均粗さRaは、好ましくは2~10nm、より好ましくは2~5nmである。算術平均粗さRaは、JIS B0601:1994に準じて測定できる。 The arithmetic average roughness Ra of the film substrate is preferably 2 to 10 nm, more preferably 2 to 5 nm. The arithmetic average roughness Ra can be measured according to JIS B0601: 1994.
 〔その他の層〕
 本実施形態の光学フィルムには、反射防止層や導電性層等、その他の層を設けることができる。
[Other layers]
The optical film of this embodiment can be provided with other layers such as an antireflection layer and a conductive layer.
 (反射防止層)
 本実施形態の光学フィルムは、硬化層上に反射防止層を塗設して、外光反射防止機能を有する反射防止フィルムとして用いることができる。
(Antireflection layer)
The optical film of this embodiment can be used as an antireflection film having an external light antireflection function by coating an antireflection layer on a cured layer.
 反射防止層は、光学干渉によって反射率が減少するように屈折率、膜厚、層の数、層順等を考慮して積層されていることが好ましい。反射防止層は、支持体である保護フィルムよりも屈折率の低い低屈折率層、もしくは支持体である保護フィルムよりも屈折率の高い高屈折率層と低屈折率層を組み合わせて構成されていることが好ましい。 The antireflection layer is preferably laminated in consideration of the refractive index, the film thickness, the number of layers, the layer order, and the like so that the reflectance is reduced by optical interference. The antireflection layer is composed of a low refractive index layer having a lower refractive index than the protective film as the support, or a combination of a high refractive index layer and a low refractive index layer having a higher refractive index than the protective film as the support. Preferably it is.
 〈低屈折率層〉
 低屈折率層は、シリカ系微粒子を含有することが好ましく、その屈折率は、23℃、波長550nm測定で、1.30~1.45の範囲であることが好ましい。
<Low refractive index layer>
The low refractive index layer preferably contains silica-based fine particles, and the refractive index is preferably in the range of 1.30 to 1.45 when measured at 23 ° C. and wavelength of 550 nm.
 低屈折率層の膜厚は、5nm~0.5μmの範囲内であることが好ましく、10nm~0.3μmの範囲内であることが更に好ましく、30nm~0.2μmの範囲内であることが最も好ましい。 The film thickness of the low refractive index layer is preferably in the range of 5 nm to 0.5 μm, more preferably in the range of 10 nm to 0.3 μm, and in the range of 30 nm to 0.2 μm. Most preferred.
 低屈折率層形成用組成物については、シリカ系微粒子として、特に外殻層を有し内部が多孔質又は空洞の粒子を少なくとも1種類以上含むことが好ましい。特に該外殻層を有し内部が多孔質又は空洞である粒子が、中空シリカ系微粒子であることが好ましい。 The composition for forming a low refractive index layer preferably contains at least one kind of particles having an outer shell layer and porous or hollow inside as silica-based fine particles. In particular, the particles having the outer shell layer and porous or hollow inside are preferably hollow silica-based fine particles.
 なお、低屈折率層形成用組成物には、下記一般式(OSi-1)で表される有機珪素化合物もしくはその加水分解物、或いは、その重縮合物を併せて含有させても良い。
 一般式(OSi-1):Si(OR)4
 式中、Rは炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。一般式で表される有機珪素化合物としては、具体的には、テトラメトキシシラン、テトラエトキシシラン、テトライソプロポキシシラン等が好ましく用いられる。
The composition for forming a low refractive index layer may contain an organosilicon compound represented by the following general formula (OSi-1) or a hydrolyzate thereof, or a polycondensate thereof.
Formula (OSi-1): Si (OR) 4
In the formula, R represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Specifically, tetramethoxysilane, tetraethoxysilane, tetraisopropoxysilane and the like are preferably used as the organosilicon compound represented by the general formula.
 また、フッ素原子を35~80質量%の範囲で含み、且つ架橋性若しくは重合性の官能基を含む含フッ素化合物を主としてなる、熱硬化性及び/又は光硬化性を有する化合物を、低屈折率層形成用組成物に含有させても良い。具体的には含フッ素ポリマー、あるいは含フッ素ゾルゲル化合物などである。含フッ素ポリマーとしては、例えばパーフルオロアルキル基含有シラン化合物〔例えば(ヘプタデカフルオロ-1,1,2,2-テトラヒドロデシル)トリエトキシシラン〕の加水分解物や脱水縮合物の他、含フッ素モノマー単位と架橋反応性単位とを構成単位とする含フッ素共重合体が挙げられる。その他、溶剤、必要に応じて、シランカップリング剤、硬化剤、界面活性剤等を低屈折率層形成用組成物に添加してもよい。 In addition, a compound having a thermosetting property and / or a photocurable property, which mainly contains a fluorine-containing compound containing a fluorine atom in a range of 35 to 80% by mass and containing a crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group, has a low refractive index. You may make it contain in the composition for layer formation. Specifically, a fluorine-containing polymer or a fluorine-containing sol-gel compound is used. Examples of the fluorine-containing polymer include hydrolysates and dehydration condensates of perfluoroalkyl group-containing silane compounds [eg (heptadecafluoro-1,1,2,2-tetrahydrodecyl) triethoxysilane], and fluorine-containing monomers. Examples thereof include fluorine-containing copolymers having units and cross-linking reactive units as constituent units. In addition, you may add a solvent, a silane coupling agent, a hardening | curing agent, surfactant, etc. to the composition for low refractive index layer formation as needed.
 〈高屈折率層〉
 高屈折率層においては、23℃、波長550nm測定で、屈折率を1.4~2.2の範囲に調整することが好ましい。また、高屈折率層の厚さは5nm~1μmが好ましく、10nm~0.2μmであることが更に好ましく、30nm~0.1μmであることが最も好ましい。屈折率の調整は、金属酸化物微粒子等を添加することで達成できる。また、用いる金属酸化物微粒子の屈折率は1.80~2.60であるものが好ましく、1.85~2.50であるものが更に好ましい。
<High refractive index layer>
In the high refractive index layer, it is preferable to adjust the refractive index to a range of 1.4 to 2.2 by measuring at 23 ° C. and a wavelength of 550 nm. The thickness of the high refractive index layer is preferably 5 nm to 1 μm, more preferably 10 nm to 0.2 μm, and most preferably 30 nm to 0.1 μm. Adjustment of the refractive index can be achieved by adding metal oxide fine particles and the like. The metal oxide fine particles used preferably have a refractive index of 1.80 to 2.60, more preferably 1.85 to 2.50.
 金属酸化物微粒子の種類は特に限定されるものではなく、Ti、Zr、Sn、Sb、Cu、Fe、Mn、Pb、Cd、As、Cr、Hg、Zn、Al、Mg、Si、P及びSから選択される少なくとも一種の元素を有する金属酸化物を用いることができる。 The kind of metal oxide fine particles is not particularly limited, and Ti, Zr, Sn, Sb, Cu, Fe, Mn, Pb, Cd, As, Cr, Hg, Zn, Al, Mg, Si, P and S A metal oxide having at least one element selected from can be used.
 〈導電性層〉
 光学フィルムには、硬化層上に導電性層を形成しても良い。設けられる導電性層としては、一般的に広く知られた導電性材料を用いることができる。例えば、酸化インジウム、酸化錫、酸化インジウム錫、金、銀、パラジウム等の金属酸化物を用いることができる。これらは、真空蒸着法、スパッタリング法、イオンプレーティング法、溶液塗布法等により、光学フィルム上に薄膜として形成することができる。また、前記したπ共役系導電性ポリマーである有機導電性材料を用いて、導電性層を形成することも可能である。
<Conductive layer>
In the optical film, a conductive layer may be formed on the cured layer. As the conductive layer provided, a generally well-known conductive material can be used. For example, metal oxides such as indium oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide, gold, silver, and palladium can be used. These can be formed as a thin film on an optical film by a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, an ion plating method, a solution coating method, or the like. Moreover, it is also possible to form a conductive layer using the organic conductive material which is the above-described π-conjugated conductive polymer.
 特に、透明性、導電性に優れ、比較的低コストに得られる酸化インジウム、酸化錫又は酸化インジウム錫のいずれかを主成分とした導電性材料を好適に使用することができる。導電性層の厚さは、適用する材料によっても異なるため一概には言えないが、表面抵抗率で1000Ω以下、好ましくは500Ω以下になるような厚さであって、経済性をも考慮すると、10nm以上、好ましくは20nm以上、80nm以下、好ましくは70nm以下の範囲が好適である。このような薄膜においては導電性層の厚さムラに起因する可視光の干渉縞は発生しにくい。 In particular, a conductive material that is excellent in transparency and conductivity, and that has a main component of any one of indium oxide, tin oxide, and indium tin oxide obtained at a relatively low cost can be suitably used. Although the thickness of the conductive layer varies depending on the material to be applied, it cannot be said unconditionally. However, the surface resistivity is 1000Ω or less, preferably 500Ω or less, and considering the economy, A range of 10 nm or more, preferably 20 nm or more and 80 nm or less, preferably 70 nm or less is suitable. In such a thin film, visible light interference fringes due to uneven thickness of the conductive layer are unlikely to occur.
 〔偏光板〕
 次に、本実施形態の光学フィルムを用いた偏光板について述べる。偏光板は一般的な方法で作製することができる。例えば、光学フィルムをアルカリ鹸化処理し、処理した光学フィルムを、ヨウ素溶液中に浸漬延伸して作製した偏光膜(偏光子)の一方の面に、完全鹸化型ポリビニルアルコール水溶液を用いて貼り合わせることが好ましい。
〔Polarizer〕
Next, a polarizing plate using the optical film of this embodiment will be described. The polarizing plate can be produced by a general method. For example, an optical film is subjected to alkali saponification treatment, and the treated optical film is bonded to one surface of a polarizing film (polarizer) produced by immersing and stretching in an iodine solution using a completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution. Is preferred.
 偏光子のもう一方の面には、該光学フィルムを貼り合わせてもよいし、前記したフィルム基材などを貼り合わせてもよい。もう一方の面に貼り合わせるフィルム基材の膜厚は、平滑性やカールバランスを整え、巻きズレ防止効果をより高める観点から、5~100μmの範囲が好ましく、5~34μmの範囲がより好ましい。 The optical film may be bonded to the other surface of the polarizer, or the above-described film substrate may be bonded. The film thickness of the film substrate to be bonded to the other surface is preferably in the range of 5 to 100 μm, more preferably in the range of 5 to 34 μm, from the viewpoint of adjusting smoothness and curl balance and further improving the effect of preventing winding deviation.
 偏光板の主たる構成要素である偏光膜は、一定方向の偏波面の光だけを通す素子であり、現在知られている代表的な偏光膜は、ポリビニルアルコール系偏光フィルムである。上記偏光フィルムには、ポリビニルアルコール系フィルムにヨウ素を染色させたものと二色性染料を染色させたものとがあるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 The polarizing film, which is the main component of the polarizing plate, is an element that transmits only light having a polarization plane in a certain direction, and a typical polarizing film that is known at present is a polyvinyl alcohol polarizing film. The polarizing film includes a polyvinyl alcohol film dyed with iodine and a dichroic dye dyed, but is not limited thereto.
 偏光膜は、ポリビニルアルコール水溶液を製膜し、これを一軸延伸させて染色するか、染色した後一軸延伸してから、好ましくはホウ素化合物で耐久性処理を行ったものが用いられる。偏光膜の膜厚は5~30μm、好ましくは8~15μmである。 For the polarizing film, a polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution is formed and dyed by uniaxial stretching or dyeing, or after uniaxial stretching after dyeing, a film subjected to durability treatment with a boron compound is preferably used. The thickness of the polarizing film is 5 to 30 μm, preferably 8 to 15 μm.
 偏光膜の面上に、本実施形態の光学フィルムの片面を貼り合わせて偏光板を形成する。好ましくは完全鹸化ポリビニルアルコール等を主成分とする水系の接着剤によって貼り合わせる。 A polarizing plate is formed by bonding one side of the optical film of the present embodiment on the surface of the polarizing film. It is preferably bonded with an aqueous adhesive mainly composed of completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol or the like.
 (円偏光板)
 光学フィルムを用いて円偏光板を構成することもできる。つまり、偏光板保護フィルム、偏光子、λ/4フィルムをこの順で積層して円偏光板を構成することができる。この場合、λ/4フィルムの遅相軸と偏光膜の吸収軸(または透過軸)とのなす角度は45°である。長尺状偏光板保護フィルム、長尺状偏光子、長尺状λ/4フィルム(長尺斜め延伸フィルム)がこの順で積層して形成されることが好ましい。
(Circularly polarizing plate)
A circularly polarizing plate can also be constituted using an optical film. That is, a circularly polarizing plate can be formed by laminating a polarizing plate protective film, a polarizer, and a λ / 4 film in this order. In this case, the angle formed between the slow axis of the λ / 4 film and the absorption axis (or transmission axis) of the polarizing film is 45 °. A long polarizing plate protective film, a long polarizer, and a long λ / 4 film (long diagonally stretched film) are preferably laminated in this order.
 円偏光板は、偏光子として、ヨウ素または二色性染料をドープしたポリビニルアルコールを延伸したものを使用し、λ/4フィルム/偏光子の構成で貼合して製造することができる。偏光子の膜厚は、5~40μm、好ましくは5~30μmであり、特に好ましくは5~20μmである。 The circularly polarizing plate can be produced by using a stretched polyvinyl alcohol doped with iodine or a dichroic dye as a polarizer, and laminating with a configuration of λ / 4 film / polarizer. The thickness of the polarizer is 5 to 40 μm, preferably 5 to 30 μm, particularly preferably 5 to 20 μm.
 円偏光板は、一般的な方法で作製することができる。つまり、ポリビニルアルコール系フィルムをヨウ素溶液中に浸漬延伸して作製した偏光子の一方の面に、完全鹸化型ポリビニルアルコール水溶液を用いて、アルカリ鹸化処理したλ/4フィルムを貼り合わせることが好ましい。 The circularly polarizing plate can be produced by a general method. In other words, it is preferable to attach an alkali saponified λ / 4 film to one surface of a polarizer produced by immersing and stretching a polyvinyl alcohol film in an iodine solution, using a completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution.
 〔粘着層〕
 液晶セルの基板と偏光板とを貼り合わせるために、偏光板のフィルム片面に用いられる粘着層は、光学的に透明であることはもとより、適度な粘弾性や粘着特性を示すものが好ましい。
(Adhesive layer)
In order to bond the substrate of the liquid crystal cell and the polarizing plate, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer used on one side of the film of the polarizing plate is preferably optically transparent and exhibits moderate viscoelasticity and pressure-sensitive adhesive properties.
 具体的な粘着層としては、例えばアクリル系共重合体やエポキシ系樹脂、ポリウレタン、シリコーン系ポリマー、ポリエーテル、ブチラール系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、合成ゴムなどの接着剤もしくは粘着剤等のポリマーを用いて、乾燥法、化学硬化法、熱硬化法、熱熔融法、光硬化法等により膜形成させ、硬化させることができる。なかでも、アクリル系共重合体は、最も粘着物性を制御しやすく、かつ透明性や耐候性、耐久性などに優れていて好ましく用いることができる。 Specific examples of the adhesive layer include adhesives or adhesives such as acrylic copolymers, epoxy resins, polyurethane, silicone polymers, polyethers, butyral resins, polyamide resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, and synthetic rubbers. A film such as a drying method, a chemical curing method, a thermal curing method, a thermal melting method, a photocuring method, or the like can be formed and cured using a polymer such as the above. Among them, the acrylic copolymer can be preferably used because it is most easy to control the physical properties of the adhesive and is excellent in transparency, weather resistance, durability and the like.
 〔画像表示装置〕
 本実施形態の光学フィルムは、画像表示装置に使用することで、視認性に優れた性能が発揮される点で好ましい。画像表示装置としては、反射型、透過型、半透過型液晶表示装置又は、TN型、STN型、OCB型、VA型、IPS型、ECB型等の各種駆動方式の液晶表示装置、有機EL表示装置やプラズマディスプレイ等が挙げられる。これら画像表示装置の中でも液晶表示装置が、高い視認性に優れる点で好ましい。
(Image display device)
The optical film of this embodiment is preferable in that the performance excellent in visibility is exhibited by using it for an image display apparatus. As an image display device, a reflection type, a transmission type, a transflective type liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device of various driving methods such as a TN type, an STN type, an OCB type, a VA type, an IPS type, and an ECB type, an organic EL display Examples thereof include a device and a plasma display. Among these image display devices, a liquid crystal display device is preferable because of its high visibility.
 視認側偏光板の光学フィルムの硬化層のさらに視認側に、保護部が配置されていてもよい。この保護部は、前面板やタッチパネルで構成することができる。上記保護部は、硬化層との間の空隙を埋めるための充填剤(光硬化型樹脂)を介して、上記硬化層に貼り合わされる。保護部の前面板は特に制限されず、アクリル板やガラス板等の従来公知のものを使用できる。また、前面板の材質、厚み等は、画像表示装置の用途に応じて、適宜選択できる。 Protective part may be arranged on the further viewing side of the cured layer of the optical film of the viewing side polarizing plate. This protection part can be constituted by a front plate or a touch panel. The said protection part is bonded together by the said hardened layer via the filler (photocurable resin) for filling the space | gap between hardened layers. The front plate in particular of a protection part is not restrict | limited, A conventionally well-known thing, such as an acrylic board and a glass plate, can be used. Further, the material, thickness, and the like of the front plate can be appropriately selected according to the use of the image display device.
 充填剤としては、無溶剤充填剤が好ましく、市販品としては例えばSVR1120、SVR1150、SVR1320(以上,デクセリアルズ株式会社製)、或いはHRJ-60、HRJ-302、HRJ-53(以上、協立化学産業株式会社製)等を挙げることができる。充填剤を用いる場合、一種類を単独で使用してもよいし、複数種類を併用してもよい。 As the filler, a solvent-free filler is preferable, and as commercially available products, for example, SVR1120, SVR1150, SVR1320 (above, manufactured by Dexerials Corporation), or HRJ-60, HRJ-302, HRJ-53 (above, Kyoritsu Chemical Industry) And the like). When using a filler, one type may be used independently and multiple types may be used together.
 光学フィルムと前面板との貼り合わせは、例えば以下のようにして行うことができる。まず、充填剤を準備する。そして、光学フィルムの硬化層の表面に充填剤を塗工し、充填剤の塗膜上に前面板を重ね合わせる。この状態で、充填剤を光照射などにより硬化させ、光学フィルムと前面板とを貼り合わせる。硬化層の表面に充填剤を塗工する際に、硬化層の表面自由エネルギーを30mN/m以上とすることで、充填剤が硬化層の端部ではじかれることなく、均一に広がった状態を維持し、視認性に優れた画像表示装置を得ることができる。 Bonding of the optical film and the front plate can be performed as follows, for example. First, a filler is prepared. Then, a filler is applied to the surface of the cured layer of the optical film, and the front plate is overlaid on the coating film of the filler. In this state, the filler is cured by light irradiation or the like, and the optical film and the front plate are bonded together. When the filler is applied to the surface of the cured layer, the surface free energy of the cured layer is set to 30 mN / m or more so that the filler is uniformly spread without being repelled at the end of the cured layer. An image display device that is maintained and has excellent visibility can be obtained.
 〔実施例〕
 以下、実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明するが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。なお、実施例において「部」あるいは「%」の表示を用いるが、特に断りがない限り「質量部」あるいは「質量%」を表す。
〔Example〕
EXAMPLES Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, although the display of "part" or "%" is used in an Example, unless otherwise indicated, "part by mass" or "mass%" is represented.
 <実施例1>
 [セルロースエステルフィルム1の作製]
 〈二酸化珪素分散液の調製〉
 アエロジルR812(日本アエロジル(株)製、一次粒子の平均径7nm)
                             10質量部
 エタノール                       90質量部
 以上をディゾルバーで30分間撹拌混合した後、マントンゴーリンで分散を行った。二酸化珪素分散液に88質量部のメチレンクロライドを撹拌しながら投入し、ディゾルバーで30分間撹拌混合し、二酸化珪素分散希釈液を作製した。微粒子分散希釈液濾過器(アドバンテック東洋(株):ポリプロピレンワインドカートリッジフィルターTCW-PPS-1N)で濾過した。
<Example 1>
[Production of Cellulose Ester Film 1]
<Preparation of silicon dioxide dispersion>
Aerosil R812 (Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd., average primary particle diameter of 7 nm)
10 parts by mass Ethanol 90 parts by mass The above was stirred and mixed with a dissolver for 30 minutes, and then dispersed with Manton Gorin. 88 parts by mass of methylene chloride was added to the silicon dioxide dispersion while stirring, and the mixture was stirred and mixed for 30 minutes with a dissolver to prepare a silicon dioxide dispersion dilution. The mixture was filtered with a fine particle dispersion dilution filter (Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd .: polypropylene wind cartridge filter TCW-PPS-1N).
 〈ドープ組成物1の調製〉
 (セルロースエステル樹脂)
 セルローストリアセテートA(リンター綿から合成されたセルローストリアセテート、アセチル基置換度2.88、Mn=140000)
                             90質量部
 (添加剤)
 一般式(X)で表されるエステル(例示化合物X-1)    5質量部
 一般式(X)で表されるエステル(例示化合物X-12)   4質量部
 (紫外線吸収剤)
 TINUVIN 928(BASFジャパン(株)製)    3質量部
 (微粒子)
 二酸化珪素分散希釈液                   4質量部
 (溶媒)
 メチレンクロライド                  432質量部
 エタノール                       38質量部
 以上を密閉容器に投入し、加熱し、撹拌しながら、完全に溶解し、安積濾紙(株)製の安積濾紙No.24を使用して濾過し、ドープ(ドープ組成物1)を調製した。
<Preparation of Dope Composition 1>
(Cellulose ester resin)
Cellulose triacetate A (cellulose triacetate synthesized from linter cotton, acetyl group substitution degree 2.88, Mn = 14,000)
90 parts by mass (additive)
Ester Represented by General Formula (X) (Exemplary Compound X-1) 5 parts by mass Ester Represented by General Formula (X) (Exemplary Compound X-12) 4 parts by mass (UV absorber)
TINUVIN 928 (manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) 3 parts by mass (fine particles)
Silicon dioxide dispersion dilution 4 parts by mass (solvent)
Methylene chloride 432 parts by mass Ethanol 38 parts by mass The above was put into a sealed container, heated and stirred, and dissolved completely. Azumi filter paper No. Azumi filter paper No. 24 was used to prepare a dope (dope composition 1).
 次に、ベルト流延装置を用い、ステンレスバンド支持体に均一に流延した。ステンレスバンド支持体で、残留溶媒量が100質量%になるまで溶媒を蒸発させ、ステンレスバンド支持体上から剥離した。セルロースエステルフィルムのウェブを35℃で溶剤を蒸発させ、1.15m幅にスリットし、テンターでTD方向(フィルムの幅手方向)に1.15倍に延伸しながら、140℃の乾燥温度で乾燥させた。その後、120℃の乾燥装置内を多数のローラーで搬送させながら15分間乾燥させた後、1.3m幅にスリットし、フィルム両端に幅10mm、高さ5μmのナーリング加工を施し、巻芯に巻き取り、セルロースエステルフィルム1を得た。セルロースエステルフィルム1の膜厚は15μm、巻長は3900mであった。 Next, the belt was cast evenly on a stainless steel band support using a belt casting apparatus. With the stainless steel band support, the solvent was evaporated until the residual solvent amount reached 100% by mass, and the stainless steel band support was peeled off. The cellulose ester film web was evaporated at 35 ° C., slit to 1.15 m width, and dried at a drying temperature of 140 ° C. while being stretched 1.15 times in the TD direction (film width direction) with a tenter. I let you. Then, it was dried for 15 minutes while being transported in a drying device at 120 ° C. with a number of rollers, slitted to a width of 1.3 m, knurled with a width of 10 mm and a height of 5 μm at both ends of the film, and wound around a core. The cellulose ester film 1 was obtained. The cellulose ester film 1 had a film thickness of 15 μm and a winding length of 3900 m.
 なお、ステンレスバンド支持体の回転速度とテンターの運転速度から算出されるMD方向の延伸倍率は1.01倍であった。 In addition, the draw ratio in the MD direction calculated from the rotational speed of the stainless steel band support and the operating speed of the tenter was 1.01.
 [光学フィルム1の作製]
 上記作製したセルロースエステルフィルム1のA面(流延ベルトに接していない面)上に、下記の硬化層組成物1を、押し出しコーターを用いて塗布し、恒率乾燥区間温度50℃、減率乾燥区間温度50℃で乾燥の後、酸素濃度が1.0体積%以下の雰囲気になるように窒素パージしながら、紫外線ランプを用い照射部の照度が100mW/cm2で、照射量を0.25J/cm2として塗布層を硬化させ、ドライ膜厚5μmの硬化層1を形成して、ロール状に巻き取り、光学フィルム1を作製した。
[Preparation of optical film 1]
The following cured layer composition 1 is applied onto the A side (the surface not in contact with the casting belt) of the produced cellulose ester film 1 using an extrusion coater, and the constant rate drying zone temperature is 50 ° C., the rate of decrease. After drying at a drying section temperature of 50 ° C., while purging with nitrogen so that the atmosphere has an oxygen concentration of 1.0% by volume or less, the irradiance of the irradiated part is 100 mW / cm 2 using an ultraviolet lamp, and the irradiation amount is set to 0. The coating layer was cured at 25 J / cm 2 to form a cured layer 1 having a dry film thickness of 5 μm, and wound into a roll to produce an optical film 1.
 《硬化層組成物1》
 〈硬化層組成物1の組成〉
 (樹脂(A))
 M-8(ウレタンアクリレート:UA-1100、新中村化学工業株式会社製)
                             90質量部
 (光重合開始剤)
 イルガキュア184(BASFジャパン(株)製)      5質量部
 (添加剤)
 シリコーン系化合物(ビックケミージャパン株式会社製:BYK-UV3510)
                              1質量部
 (化合物(B))
 F-1(ビフェニル-2-カルボン酸、分子量198、東京化成工業(株)社製)
                             10質量部
 (溶剤)
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル         10質量部
 酢酸メチル                       30質量部
 メチルエチルケトン                   70質量部
<< Hardened layer composition 1 >>
<Composition of cured layer composition 1>
(Resin (A))
M-8 (urethane acrylate: UA-1100, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
90 parts by mass (photopolymerization initiator)
Irgacure 184 (manufactured by BASF Japan) 5 parts by mass (additive)
Silicone compound (BYK-UV3510, manufactured by BYK Japan)
1 part by mass (compound (B))
F-1 (biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid, molecular weight 198, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
10 parts by mass (solvent)
Propylene glycol monomethyl ether 10 parts by weight Methyl acetate 30 parts by weight Methyl ethyl ketone 70 parts by weight
 [光学フィルム2~15の作製]
 光学フィルム1の硬化層組成物1の樹脂(A)および化合物(B)を、表1に記載した樹脂(A)および化合物(B)にそれぞれ変更した以外は、光学フィルム1の作製と同様にして光学フィルム2~15を作製した。
[Preparation of optical films 2 to 15]
Except that the resin (A) and the compound (B) of the cured layer composition 1 of the optical film 1 were changed to the resin (A) and the compound (B) described in Table 1, respectively, in the same manner as the production of the optical film 1. Thus, optical films 2 to 15 were produced.
 なお、表1において、樹脂M-1は、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(A-HD-N、新中村工業社製)であり、樹脂M-2は、1,10-デカンジオールジアクリレート(A-DOD、新中村工業社製)である。また、樹脂M’-1は、トリメチロールプロパントリアクリラート(TMPTA、東京化成工業社製)であり、樹脂M’-2は、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(A-DCP、新中村工業社製)である。参考のため、樹脂M’-1および樹脂M’-2の構造式を以下に示す。 In Table 1, resin M-1 is 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Kogyo Co., Ltd.), and resin M-2 is 1,10-decanediol diacrylate. (A-DOD, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Kogyo Co., Ltd.). Resin M′-1 is trimethylolpropane triacrylate (TMPTA, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and resin M′-2 is tricyclodecane dimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, Shin-Nakamura Industrial Co., Ltd.). Made). For reference, the structural formulas of Resin M′-1 and Resin M′-2 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
 また、表1において、化合物F-2は、2,2-ビフェニルジカルボン酸(分子量242、東京化成工業社製)であり、化合物F-3は、安息香酸(分子量122、東京化成工業社製)であり、化合物F-4は、1,3,5-トリス(4’-カルボキシ[1,1’-ビフェニル]-4-イル)ベンゼン(分子量667、Aldrich社製)であり、化合物G-3は、1-ベンジル-5-フェニルバルビツル酸(分子量294、東京化成工業社製)である。また、化合物F’-1は、ベンゼンスルホン酸(東京化成工業社製)であり、化合物F’-2は、チヌビンP(チバ・ジャパン社製)であり、化合物F’-3は、デカン酸(東京化成工業社製)である。参考のため、化合物F’-1、F’-2、F’-3の構造式を以下に示す。 In Table 1, compound F-2 is 2,2-biphenyldicarboxylic acid (molecular weight 242; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and compound F-3 is benzoic acid (molecular weight 122, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Compound F-4 is 1,3,5-tris (4′-carboxy [1,1′-biphenyl] -4-yl) benzene (molecular weight 667, manufactured by Aldrich), and compound G-3 Is 1-benzyl-5-phenylbarbituric acid (molecular weight 294, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Compound F′-1 is benzenesulfonic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), compound F′-2 is Tinuvin P (manufactured by Ciba Japan), and compound F′-3 is decanoic acid. (Manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). For reference, structural formulas of compounds F′-1, F′-2, and F′-3 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
 [光学フィルム16・17の作製]
 光学フィルム6の硬化層組成物1において、樹脂(A)に加えて、表2に記載したサブ樹脂A-1、A-5(化33、化34参照)をそれぞれ添加した以外は、光学フィルム6の作製と同様にして光学フィルム16・17を作製した。
[Preparation of optical films 16 and 17]
In the cured layer composition 1 of the optical film 6, the optical film except that the sub resins A-1 and A-5 shown in Table 2 (see Chemical formula 33 and Chemical formula 34) were added in addition to the resin (A), respectively. Optical films 16 and 17 were produced in the same manner as in the production of 6.
 ≪評価≫
 (1.透湿度の測定)
 JIS Z-0208に準拠して、80℃90%RHの環境下で、光学フィルム1~17の透湿度(g/m2/24h)を測定し、以下の基準で評価した。
 〈評価基準〉
  ◎:透湿度が1300g/m2/24h未満である。
  ○:透湿度が1300g/m2/24h以上2000g/m2/24h未満である。
  △:透湿度が2000g/m2/24h以上2500g/m2/24h未満である。
  ×:透湿度が2500g/m2/24h以上である。
≪Evaluation≫
(1. Measurement of moisture permeability)
According to JIS Z-0208, the moisture permeability (g / m 2 / 24h) of optical films 1 to 17 was measured in an environment of 80 ° C. and 90% RH, and evaluated according to the following criteria.
<Evaluation criteria>
◎: moisture permeability is less than 1300g / m 2 / 24h.
○: moisture permeability is less than 1300g / m 2 / 24h or more 2000g / m 2 / 24h.
△: moisture permeability is less than 2000g / m 2 / 24h or more 2500g / m 2 / 24h.
×: it moisture permeability 2500g / m 2 / 24h or more.
 (2.鉛筆硬度の測定)
 作製した光学フィルム1~17を、温度23℃、相対湿度55%の条件で2時間以上調湿した後、JIS S 6006が規定する試験用鉛筆を用いて、加重500g条件で、JIS K5400が規定する鉛筆硬度評価方法に従って硬化層の鉛筆硬度を測定し、以下の基準に基づいて評価した。
  〈評価基準〉
  ◎:鉛筆硬度がH以上である。
  ○:鉛筆硬度が0.5H以上H未満である。
  △:鉛筆硬度がF以上0.5H未満である
  ×:鉛筆硬度がF未満である。
(2. Measurement of pencil hardness)
The prepared optical films 1 to 17 were conditioned for 2 hours or more at a temperature of 23 ° C. and a relative humidity of 55%, and then specified by JIS K5400 with a weight of 500 g using a test pencil specified by JIS S 6006. The pencil hardness of the cured layer was measured according to the pencil hardness evaluation method to be evaluated based on the following criteria.
<Evaluation criteria>
A: Pencil hardness is H or more.
○: Pencil hardness is 0.5H or more and less than H.
Δ: Pencil hardness is F or more and less than 0.5H ×: Pencil hardness is less than F
 光学フィルム1~17についての評価結果、および化合物(B)の第1酸解離定数pKa1等の物性を表1および表2に示す。なお、酸解離定数の測定方法としては、丸善(株)刊 実験化学講座第2版の215ページ~217ページに記載のアルカリ適定法を採用した。 Tables 1 and 2 show the evaluation results of the optical films 1 to 17 and the physical properties such as the first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of the compound (B). As a method for measuring the acid dissociation constant, the alkali titration method described on pages 215 to 217 of the second edition of Experimental Chemistry Course published by Maruzen Co., Ltd. was adopted.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000066
 表1より、2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の最大の数が8以上であり、かつ、前記スペーサに環構造を含まない樹脂(A)と、環構造を有し、かつ、第1酸解離定数pKa1が1.0以上7.0以下である化合物(B)とを有する実施例の光学フィルムは、80℃90%RHの環境下で低透湿(評価が◎または○)であることから、高温高湿環境下での偏光子の保護機能の低下を抑えて、偏光子の耐久性低下を抑えることができると言える。 As shown in Table 1, the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not contain a ring structure, and the spacer has a ring structure. In addition, the optical film of the example having the compound (B) having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less has low moisture permeability (evaluation is 80 ° C. and 90% RH). Therefore, it can be said that a decrease in the durability of the polarizer can be suppressed by suppressing a decrease in the protective function of the polarizer in a high temperature and high humidity environment.
 特に、光学フィルム5、6、14、15の結果より、透湿性能の劣化を確実に抑える観点では、化合物(B)としては、分子量が130以上500以下の化合物(例えばF-2、G-3参照)であることが望ましいと言える。 In particular, from the results of optical films 5, 6, 14, and 15, from the viewpoint of reliably suppressing deterioration of moisture permeability, the compound (B) is a compound having a molecular weight of 130 to 500 (for example, F-2, G- 3) is desirable.
 また、表2より、鉛筆硬度を向上させる観点では、分子内に環構造を持ち、活性エネルギー基を有する化合物を含むサブ樹脂(A-1、A-5参照)を添加することが望ましいと言える。 From Table 2, it can be said that it is desirable to add a sub-resin (see A-1 and A-5) containing a compound having a ring structure in the molecule and having an active energy group from the viewpoint of improving pencil hardness. .
 なお、上記した実施例では、フィルム基材が薄膜であることが前提であるため、フィルム基材として、膜厚15μmのセルロースエステルフィルムを用いており、これによって上述の効果が得られている。フィルム基材の膜厚が5μm以上35μm未満の範囲であれば、15μm以外の膜厚であっても、薄膜であることに変わりはないため、上記した実施例と同様の効果が得られることが推測される。 In addition, in the above-mentioned Example, since it is a premise that a film base material is a thin film, the above-mentioned effect is acquired by using the 15-micrometer-thick cellulose-ester film as a film base material. If the thickness of the film substrate is in the range of 5 μm or more and less than 35 μm, even if it is a film thickness other than 15 μm, there is no change to the thin film, so that the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Guessed.
 以上で説明した本実施形態の光学フィルム、偏光板、および画像表示装置は、以下のように表現することができる。 The optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device of the present embodiment described above can be expressed as follows.
 1.透明基材の少なくとも一方の面に硬化層を有する光学フィルムであって、
 前記透明基材は、膜厚が5μm以上35μm未満のセルロース系フィルムであり、
 前記硬化層が、
 2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の最大の数が8以上であり、かつ、前記スペーサに環構造を含まない、少なくとも1種の活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)と、
 環構造を有し、かつ、第1酸解離定数pKa1が1.0以上7.0以下である少なくとも1種の化合物(B)とを含有していることを特徴とする光学フィルム。
1. An optical film having a cured layer on at least one surface of a transparent substrate,
The transparent substrate is a cellulose film having a film thickness of 5 μm or more and less than 35 μm,
The cured layer is
At least one kind of active energy ray-curable resin (A), wherein the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not contain a ring structure; ,
An optical film comprising a ring structure and at least one compound (B) having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less.
 2.前記化合物(B)の分子量が、130以上500以下であることを特徴とする前記1に記載の光学フィルム。 2. 2. The optical film as described in 1 above, wherein the molecular weight of the compound (B) is 130 or more and 500 or less.
 3.前記セルロース系フィルムが、セルロースエステルフィルムであり、かつ、下記一般式(P)で表されるモノマーに由来する繰り返し単位を含む重合体、下記一般式(Q)で表される有機酸、下記一般式(S)で表わされる化合物の少なくともいずれかを含有していることを特徴とする前記1または2に記載の光学フィルム。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
 (一般式(P)において、R1は水素原子または炭素数1~4の脂肪族基を表す。R2は置換基を表す。(A)は5または6員環を形成するのに必要な原子群を表す。nは0~4の整数を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
 (一般式(Q)において、R26はアリール基を表し、R27およびR28はそれぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
 (一般式(S)において、R1は水素原子又は置換基を表し、R2は下記一般式(a)で表される置換基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表し、n1が2以上のとき、複数のR1は互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。n2は1~5の整数を表し、n2が2以上のとき、複数のR2は互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
 (一般式(a)において、Aは置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表し、R3及びR4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基又は下記一般式(b)で表される置換基を表す。R5は、単結合又は炭素原子数1~5のアルキレン基を表し、Xは、置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表す。n3は0~10の整数を表し、n3が2以上のとき、複数のR5及びXは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
 (一般式(b)において、Xは、置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表し、R6、R7、R8、及びR9は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又は炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基を表す。n5は1~11の整数を表し、n5が2以上のとき、複数のR6、R7、R8及びXは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
3. The cellulose-based film is a cellulose ester film, and a polymer containing a repeating unit derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (P), an organic acid represented by the following general formula (Q), 3. The optical film as described in 1 or 2 above, which contains at least one of the compounds represented by formula (S).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
(In the general formula (P), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. R 2 represents a substituent. (A) is necessary for forming a 5- or 6-membered ring. Represents an atomic group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
(In general formula (Q), R 26 represents an aryl group, and R 27 and R 28 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
(In the general formula (S), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 2 represents a substituent represented by the following general formula (a). N1 represents an integer of 0 to 4, and n1 is 2 In the above, a plurality of R 1 may be the same or different from each other, n2 represents an integer of 1 to 5, and when n2 is 2 or more, a plurality of R 2 may be the same or different from each other May be.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
(In the general formula (a), A represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring, and R 3 and R 4 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or the following general formula (b R 5 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring, and n3 represents an integer of 0 to 10 And when n3 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 5 and X may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
(In the general formula (b), X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring, and R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , and R 9 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. N5 represents an integer of 1 to 11, and when n5 is 2 or more, a plurality of R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and X may be the same or different.
 4.前記硬化層が、2層以上設けられていることを特徴とする前記1から3のいずれかに記載の光学フィルム。 4. 2. The optical film as described in any one of 1 to 3, wherein two or more hardened layers are provided.
 5.前記1から4のいずれかに記載の光学フィルムが、偏光子の一方の面に貼り合わされていることを特徴とする偏光板。 5. 5. A polarizing plate, wherein the optical film according to any one of 1 to 4 is bonded to one surface of a polarizer.
 6.前記5に記載の偏光板が、表示セルの少なくとも一方の面側に設けられていることを特徴とする画像表示装置。 6. 6. An image display device, wherein the polarizing plate according to 5 is provided on at least one surface side of the display cell.
 本発明の光学フィルムは、偏光板や、液晶表示装置などの画像表示装置に利用可能である。 The optical film of the present invention can be used for image display devices such as polarizing plates and liquid crystal display devices.
   1   画像表示装置
   4   液晶セル(表示セル)
   5   偏光板
  11   偏光子
  12   フィルム基材(透明基材、セルロース系フィルム)
  13   硬化層
  15   光学フィルム
1 Image display device 4 Liquid crystal cell (display cell)
5 Polarizing plate 11 Polarizer 12 Film substrate (transparent substrate, cellulose film)
13 Hardened layer 15 Optical film

Claims (6)

  1.  透明基材の少なくとも一方の面に硬化層を有する光学フィルムであって、
     前記透明基材は、膜厚が5μm以上35μm未満のセルロース系フィルムであり、
     前記硬化層が、
     2つの活性エネルギー基をつなぐスペーサとして直鎖状に並ぶ原子の最大の数が8以上であり、かつ、前記スペーサに環構造を含まない、少なくとも1種の活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂(A)と、
     環構造を有し、かつ、第1酸解離定数pKa1が1.0以上7.0以下である少なくとも1種の化合物(B)とを含有していることを特徴とする光学フィルム。
    An optical film having a cured layer on at least one surface of a transparent substrate,
    The transparent substrate is a cellulose film having a film thickness of 5 μm or more and less than 35 μm,
    The cured layer is
    At least one kind of active energy ray-curable resin (A), wherein the maximum number of atoms arranged in a straight line as a spacer connecting two active energy groups is 8 or more, and the spacer does not contain a ring structure; ,
    An optical film comprising a ring structure and at least one compound (B) having a first acid dissociation constant pKa 1 of 1.0 or more and 7.0 or less.
  2.  前記化合物(B)の分子量が、130以上500以下であることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の光学フィルム。 The optical film according to claim 1, wherein the molecular weight of the compound (B) is 130 or more and 500 or less.
  3.  前記セルロース系フィルムが、セルロースエステルフィルムであり、かつ、下記一般式(P)で表されるモノマーに由来する繰り返し単位を含む重合体、下記一般式(Q)で表される有機酸、下記一般式(S)で表わされる化合物の少なくともいずれかを含有していることを特徴とする請求項1または2に記載の光学フィルム。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     (一般式(P)において、R1は水素原子または炭素数1~4の脂肪族基を表す。R2は置換基を表す。(A)は5または6員環を形成するのに必要な原子群を表す。nは0~4の整数を表す。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     (一般式(Q)において、R26はアリール基を表し、R27およびR28はそれぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基を表す。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     (一般式(S)において、R1は水素原子又は置換基を表し、R2は下記一般式(a)で表される置換基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表し、n1が2以上のとき、複数のR1は互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。n2は1~5の整数を表し、n2が2以上のとき、複数のR2は互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     (一般式(a)において、Aは置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表し、R3及びR4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基又は下記一般式(b)で表される置換基を表す。R5は、単結合又は炭素原子数1~5のアルキレン基を表し、Xは、置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表す。n3は0~10の整数を表し、n3が2以上のとき、複数のR5及びXは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     (一般式(b)において、Xは、置換又は無置換の芳香族環を表し、R6、R7、R8、及びR9は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又は炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基を表す。n5は1~11の整数を表し、n5が2以上のとき、複数のR6、R7、R8及びXは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
    The cellulose-based film is a cellulose ester film, and a polymer containing a repeating unit derived from a monomer represented by the following general formula (P), an organic acid represented by the following general formula (Q), The optical film according to claim 1, comprising at least one of the compounds represented by formula (S).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (In the general formula (P), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. R 2 represents a substituent. (A) is necessary for forming a 5- or 6-membered ring. Represents an atomic group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (In general formula (Q), R 26 represents an aryl group, and R 27 and R 28 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    (In the general formula (S), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 2 represents a substituent represented by the following general formula (a). N1 represents an integer of 0 to 4, and n1 is 2 In the above, a plurality of R 1 may be the same or different from each other, n2 represents an integer of 1 to 5, and when n2 is 2 or more, a plurality of R 2 may be the same or different from each other May be.)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    (In the general formula (a), A represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring, and R 3 and R 4 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or the following general formula (b R 5 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring, and n3 represents an integer of 0 to 10 And when n3 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 5 and X may be the same or different.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    (In the general formula (b), X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic ring, and R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , and R 9 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. N5 represents an integer of 1 to 11, and when n5 is 2 or more, a plurality of R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and X may be the same or different.
  4.  前記硬化層が、2層以上設けられていることを特徴とする請求項1から3のいずれかに記載の光学フィルム。 The optical film according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein two or more hardened layers are provided.
  5.  請求項1から4のいずれかに記載の光学フィルムが、偏光子の一方の面に貼り合わされていることを特徴とする偏光板。 A polarizing plate, wherein the optical film according to any one of claims 1 to 4 is bonded to one surface of a polarizer.
  6.  請求項5に記載の偏光板が、表示セルの少なくとも一方の面側に設けられていることを特徴とする画像表示装置。 6. An image display device, wherein the polarizing plate according to claim 5 is provided on at least one surface side of the display cell.
PCT/JP2015/061613 2014-09-10 2015-04-15 Optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device WO2016038922A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014184449 2014-09-10
JP2014-184449 2014-09-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016038922A1 true WO2016038922A1 (en) 2016-03-17

Family

ID=55458685

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/061613 WO2016038922A1 (en) 2014-09-10 2015-04-15 Optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2016038922A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019004046A1 (en) * 2017-06-27 2019-01-03 住友化学株式会社 Adhesive composition and adhesive layer-bearing film

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013174851A (en) * 2011-04-21 2013-09-05 Fujifilm Corp Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
WO2014112575A1 (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-24 富士フイルム株式会社 Optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device
WO2014133147A1 (en) * 2013-03-01 2014-09-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Optical film, polarizing plate and image display device
JP2014170130A (en) * 2013-03-04 2014-09-18 Fujifilm Corp Optical film and production method of the same, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2015007768A (en) * 2013-05-29 2015-01-15 富士フイルム株式会社 Low moisture-permeable film, optical film, polarizing plate, liquid crystal display device, and production method of low moisture-permeable film
JP2015096939A (en) * 2013-10-09 2015-05-21 富士フイルム株式会社 Polarizing plate protective film, polarizing plate, liquid crystal display device, and manufacturing method for polarizing plate protective film

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013174851A (en) * 2011-04-21 2013-09-05 Fujifilm Corp Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
WO2014112575A1 (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-24 富士フイルム株式会社 Optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device
WO2014133147A1 (en) * 2013-03-01 2014-09-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Optical film, polarizing plate and image display device
JP2014170130A (en) * 2013-03-04 2014-09-18 Fujifilm Corp Optical film and production method of the same, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2015007768A (en) * 2013-05-29 2015-01-15 富士フイルム株式会社 Low moisture-permeable film, optical film, polarizing plate, liquid crystal display device, and production method of low moisture-permeable film
JP2015096939A (en) * 2013-10-09 2015-05-21 富士フイルム株式会社 Polarizing plate protective film, polarizing plate, liquid crystal display device, and manufacturing method for polarizing plate protective film

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019004046A1 (en) * 2017-06-27 2019-01-03 住友化学株式会社 Adhesive composition and adhesive layer-bearing film

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI569967B (en) A polarizing plate and a liquid crystal display device using the same
JP6015469B2 (en) Optical film roll, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
JP6673363B2 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate and image display device
WO2013118641A1 (en) Hard coating film, polarizing plate, glass scattering prevention film for image display device, touch panel, and liquid crystal display device
US20150185368A1 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display using the same, and compound
JPWO2014136529A1 (en) Optical film, and polarizing plate and VA liquid crystal display device including the same
WO2015098685A1 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate and image display device
JP2015179204A (en) Hard coat film, polarizing plate, and image display device
JP5994746B2 (en) Liquid crystal display device with hard coat film, polarizing plate and touch panel
JP5943070B2 (en) Hard coat film, method for producing hard coat film, and touch panel display device
KR101361251B1 (en) Phase difference film, polarization plate using the same, and liquid crystal display unit
JP6164050B2 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, manufacturing method thereof, and image display device
WO2014068802A1 (en) Optical film, method for producing optical film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
WO2015151795A1 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, method for producing polarizing plate, image display device and method for manufacturing image display device
JP5888410B2 (en) Method for producing hard coat film
WO2016038922A1 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device
WO2016035404A1 (en) Optical film, polarizer, and image display device
JP5962002B2 (en) Polarizing plate and display device using the same
JP2015025877A (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
WO2016009743A1 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate and image display device
US9618788B2 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display using the same
WO2016013261A1 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate and image display device
JP2017021181A (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, and image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15839902

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15839902

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1